Home

Icom i7700 User's Manual

1. Max clockwise O I feom Before first applying power make sure all connections required for your system are complete by referring to Section 2 Then reset the transceiver using the follow ing procedure Y Resetting CLEARS all programmed contents in A memory channels and returns programmed values 7 in set mode to default values NNN Turn the main power ON with I O on the rear panel e The transceiver power is still OFF and the power indi cator lights orange 2 While pushing and holding and MW push to turn power ON e The CPU is reset e The CPU start up takes approx 5 sec e The transceiver displays its initial VFO frequencies when resetting is complete 3 Change the set mode settings after resetting if de sired 7 In cooler temperatures the LCD may appear dark f and unstable after turning power ON This is normal 7 and does not indicate any equipment malfunction After resetting the transceiver set controls as shown in the figure below KEY SPEED NR 10 12 o clock Max counter clockwise DELAY NB Max counter clockwise TWIN PBT SPLIT
2. S 388 8 7 NOTE O 0 9 ZG When RF control is adjusted CCW in FM mode O G audio output decreases then disappears This is nor z CoO og 7 mal not a malfunction Sensitivity increases Sensitivity decreases E Squelch level adjustment e The squelch mutes noise output from the speaker lt closed squelch when no signal is received When no signal is received rotate SQL control O Z0 fully counterclockwise first then rotate SQL clock o 22 wise to the point that the noise just disappears amp S ale 6 6G D e Push and hold MONITOR to open the squelch temporar ily say Noise squelch em FM mode only S meter squelch open 3 9 3 BASIC OPERATIONS E Meter indication selection EI com SEs 5 2600 Q Of ES Mm ce F gt O O J J i 0000 Signal strength level readout ID readout readout pp ae iar VSWR readout ka C
3. O O SSN KN JE O gt 955555 c Seri 3 1 1000 000 00 1 1000 000 00 OOOO OOOO FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE 5 The preamp amplifies received signals in the receiver front end to improve the S N ratio and sensitivity Set this to preamp 1 or preamp 2 when receiving weak sig nals gt Push P AMP MF3 several times to set the preamp OFF preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON Gr For all HF bands High gain preamp for 24 MHz band and kr oe v About the P AMP2 The P AMP 2 is a high gain receive amplifier When the P AMP 2 is used in the presence of strong elec tromagnetic fields distortion sometimes results In such cases use the transceiver with the P AMP 1 or P AMP OFF setting The P AMP 2 is most effective when e Used on bands above 24 MHz and when signals are weak e Receive sensitivity is insufficient when using low gain antennas or while using a narrow band antenna such as small loop a Beverage antenna or a short Yagi ant
4. m 28 50 OF SES S acc nme ANT Type I ANTS Type OFF WIDE vec OFF A 10 3 ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION 10 This function stores the antenna connector number for each frequency band 1 Push several times to close multi function screen if necessary 2 Push and hold ANT MF1 for 1 sec to select an tenna set screen 3 Select the desired frequency band with a band key 4 Push ANT MF1 several times to select the desired antenna number that you want to set for the se lected frequency band e X appears Push and hold F 3 ANT MW for 1 sec to store the antenna selection into the antenna memory e x disappears 6 Repeat the steps O to to store the antenna se lection for another frequency bands if desired 7 Push EXIT SET to exit antenna set screen When no antenna is connected to ANT2 ANT3 and or ANT4 these antenna connectors can be de activated deleting the antenna number from the available selections This prevents the transceiver from accidentally transmitting into an unused antenna con nector In addition a receive only antenna can be specified for ANT 4 1 Select the antenna set screen as described above Q Push F 7 ANT TYPE to sel
5. OOOO 0 0000 000 00 1 L MIC REC LEVEL lm REC Appears Adjust MIC control so that this indicator reads within 100 Confirming a message for transmit Z feom TERJE SCF GI O Soo O GI O O ESSEN 3 eS oo d o 6 ol os F3 O O 11000 000 00 lt 7 6 To transmit a message using the voice recorder record the desired message in advance as described below The IC 7700 has digital voice memories for transmis sion up to 4 messages and a total message length of up to 99 sec can be recorded 1 Push several times to close a multi func tion screen if necessary 2 Push F 2 VOICE to call up the voice recorder screen 3 Push to select voice recorder menu 4 Push F 2 MIC REC to select the voice mic record screen 5 Push F 1 A or F 2 V to select the desired mes sage 6 Push and hold F 4 REC for 1 sec to start record ing p indicator appears e Speak into the microphone without pushing PTT
6. Main dial F 1 F 2 e Keyer set mode screen Dot Dash Ratio Rise Time Paddle Polarity Keyer Type MIC Up Down Keyer Keyer Repeat Time When sending CW using the repeat timer this item sets the time between transmission Dot Dash Ratio This item sets the dot dash ratio Keying weight example Morse code K DOT fixed Pas ee Weight setting Adjusted EE Adjustable range TR SPACE fixed SPAGE and DOT length can be adjusted with KEY SPEED only Weight setting 1 1 3 default Rise Time This item sets the rise time of the transmitted CW en velope About rise time T Key action Rx Set Tx power level Tx output power Rise time 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT This set mode is used to set the memory keyer repeat time dash weight paddle specifications keyer type etc e Setting contents 1 During CW mode operation push F 3eKEYER to select memory keyer screen 2 Push to select memory keyer menu then push F 4 CW KEY to select keyer set mode 3 Push F 1 A or F 2 W to select the desired set item Set the desired condition using the main dial e Push and hold F 4 DEF for 1 sec to select the default condition or value 5 Push EXIT SET twice to normal screen 2s
7. o o Ly IO 8 2 Push to select memory mode 2 Push a v several times to select the de sired memory channel e Push and hold a w for continuous selection e UP and DN on the microphone can also be used 3 To return to VFO mode push again Push to select memory mode 2 Push F INP ey 3 Push the desired memory channel number using the keypad e Enter 100 or 101 to select scan edge channel P1 or P2 respectively Push Jor v to select the desired memory channel EXAMPLE To select the memory channel 3 Push FNPenr 7 3 then push Jor w To select the memory channel 12 Push FNP enr 18 1 35 2 then push _ Jor v To select the scan edge channel P1 Push FNP enr 18 1150 __o 50 o0 then push jor _v To select the scan edge channel P2 Push FNP enr 1 8 1 50 o0 18 1 then push a jor y E Memory channel programming Programming in VFO mode EXAMPLE Programming 7 088 MHZz LSB into memory
8. soo 1 Call up the voice recorder screen RX memory COM Er Push F 1 A or F 2 V to select the desired voice message O G Push F 4 PROTECT to turn the protect function r ON and OFF e f indicator appears when the contents is protected 4 Push twice to exit the voice recorder screen The recorded contents can be erased independently by message Call up the voice recorder screen RX memory Glem I gt 9 i OGAN ee Q Push F 1 A or F 2 V to select the desired voice SES message to be erased 3 oc 3 Push and hold F 5 CLR for 1 sec to erase the con p i W tents 27G DS e Push F 4 PROTECT to release the protection in ad 2 B o o o d 0o00 o vance if necessary T 4 Push twice to exit the voice recorder screen 7 5 7 VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS E Recording a message for transmit Recording EI com EGEN 20 Of
9. 1 Select a phone mode SSB AM FM 2 Push to turn VOX function ON 3 While speaking into the microphone with your nor mal voice level rotate VOX GAIN to the point where the transceiver is continuously transmitting 4 During receive rotate ANTI VOX to the point where the transceiver does not switch to transmit due to received audio from the speaker 5 Adjust the VOX delay and the VOX voice delay in VOX GAIN ANTI VOX VOX set mode if necessary VOX set mode 1 Push and hold for 1 sec to enter VOX set mode 2 Select the desired item using F 1 A or F 2 V 3 Rotate the main dial to the desired set value or con dition e Push and hold F 4 DEF for 1 sec to select a default value 4 Push to exit VOX set mode VOX Delay Set the VOX delay for a convenient interval before re turning to receive within 0 to 2 0 sec range VOX Voice Delay Short Set the VOX voice delay to prevent unintended trans Y When using the VOX voice delay turn the TX mon mission of your voice when switching to transmit G itor function OFF to prevent transmitted audio from Short
10. E com a n SSS 50 gt O HER O SSN Cy 30 JS ser 550 DRIVE Drive gain range ats g g 3 13 BASIC OPERATIONS 3 The drive gain is active for all modes other than SSB mode with speech compressor OFF The DRIVE con trol adjusts the amplifying gain at the driver stage Before transmitting monitor your selected operating frequency to make sure transmitting won t cause inter ference to other stations on the same frequency 1 Push METER MF2 to select the ALC meter 2 Push PTT microphone SSB with COMP ON AM or FM key down CW or push RTTY or PSK to transmit 3 While talking into the microphone keying down or transmitting rotate DRIVE so that the ALC meter reading is between 30 to 50 of the ALC scale see left i into the microphone at your normal voice level Release PTT stop keying or push again to return to receive RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT Section 4 E NE ee 4 2 Convenient functions for receive cece cece cece cece eee eeeeeneeeneees 4 2 Convenient functions for transmit ccce ccc eee cece eee eee eeeeeaes 4 3 About 5 MHz band operation USA version only 068 4 3 E Operating OW ae en ae na ee ee ee 4 4 Convenient functions for receive cece cece cece cece eee eeeeeeeeeeaeees 4 4 Convenient f
11. CI BEI o 5555 565 If a band key is pushed once the frequency and oper ating mode last used are called up When the key is pushed again another stored frequency and operating mode are called up See the table below for a list of the bands available and the default settings for each band BAND REGISTER 2 REGISTER 3 REGISTER 1 1 8 MHz 3 5 MHz 7 MHz 10 MHz 14 MHz 1 900000 MHz CW 3 550000 MHz LSB 7 050000 MHz LSB 10 120000 MHz CW 14 100000 MHz USB 1 910000 MHz CW 3 560000 MHz LSB 7 060000 MHz LSB 10 130000 MHz CW 14 200000 MHz USB 1 915000 MHz CW 3 580000 MHz LSB 7 020000 MHz CW 10 140000 MHz CW 14 050000 MHz CW 18 MHz 21 MHz 24 MHz 28 MHz 50 MHz General 18 100000 MHz USB 21 200000 MHz USB 24 950000 MHz USB 28 500000 MHz USB 50 100000 MHz USB 15 000000 MHz USB Using the band stacking registers Example 14 MHz band 18 130000 MHz USB 21 300000 MHz USB 24 980000 MHz USB 29 500000 MHz USB 50 200000 MHz USB 15 100000 MHz USB 18 150000 MHz USB 21 050000 MHz CW 24 900000 MHz CW 28 100000 MHz CW 51 000000 MHz FM 15 200000 MHz USB 1 Push 14 5 then select a frequency and an op erating mode e Frequency and
12. SSS Ss JS 0000 o o COO 3 3 BASIC OPERATIONS 3 Push to switch between VFO and memory modes Wey or WAF appears when in VFO mode or the selected memory channel number appears when in memory mode e Pushing and holding for 1 sec transfers the contents of the selected memory channel to VFO p 8 4 VFO is an abbreviation of Variable Frequency Oscilla tor and is commonly referred to as a main tuning func tion The main dial is often called the VFO knob In VFO mode push to toggle VFO A and VFO B T or AT appears when VFO A or VFO B is selected respectively In VFO mode push and hold for 1 sec to set the undisplayed VFO frequency and mode to those of the displayed VFO e Three beeps sound when the VFO equalization is com pleted 3 BASIC OPERATIONS E Selecting an operating band Band keys The triple band stacking register provides 3 memories for each band key storing frequency and mode infor mation com eie 20 oO O amp sel U This function is convenient when you operate 3 modes on one band For example one register is used for a CW frequency another for an SSB frequency and the other one for an RTTY frequency
13. NB control NR OY NB set mode To deal with various type of noises attenuation level and noise blank time can be set in NB set mode Push and hold for 1 sec to enter NB set mode 2 Push F 1 A or F 2 V to select the desired item 3 Rotate the main dial to set the desired level or value e Push and hold F 4 DEF for 1 sec to select a default value 4 Push to exit NB set mode TNE Depth NB Width ZZZ 8 Set the noise attenuation level from 1 to 10 NB Width mim 50 Set the blank time from 1 to 100 5 16 E Noise reduction NR control E Dial lock function com ER O O g 5 Ge SO e LOCK indicator LOC O GSE S55 30 EI J 50 SBS 80 30 G A 5 17 FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE 5 The noise reduction function reduces random noise components and enhances desired signals which are
14. 16 16 44 UTC 16 16 USB 2ch USB FIL2 14 7195 00 VFO A 14 018 00 CW 0 500 000 LSB SCAN EDGE 29 999 999 USB IL SCAN EDGE 10 120 000 CW feom CO Sasa Cc Ce a I aE Os 555545 30000 G00 00 O O 18ch USS FIL2 1 280 00 VFO A 14 195 00 USB Beep Beep Push for 1 sec Beep 8 6 All memory channels including scan edges can be tagged with alohanumeric names of up to 10 charac ters each Capital letters small letters numerals some symbols 4 N NQ amp Y N4 lt gt 111 and spaces can be used Push several times to close a multi func tion screen if necessary 2 Push F 4 MEMORY to select memory list screen 3 Select the desired memory channel 4 Push F 4 NAME to edit memory channel name e A cursor appears and blinks e Memory channel names of blank channels cannot be edited Input the desired character by rotating the main dial or by pushing the keypad for number input e Push ABC or abc to toggle capital and small letters e Push 123 or Symbol to toggle numerals and symbols e
15. JOOOOODO The IC 7700 has a 2 step protection function to protect the final power amplifiers The protector monitors the power amplifier tempera ture and activates when the temperature becomes ex tremely high e Power down transmission Reduces the transmit output power to 100 W LMT appears beside the transmit indicator during transmit e Transmission inhibit Deactivates the transmitter The transmit indicator is displayed in gray during transmit When the protector is activated wait until the power amplifier cools down using the transceiver in stand by or receive condition 7 NOTE DO NOT turn the transceiver power OFF Y when the protector is ON If you do the cooling fan 7 will not function and it will take longer to cool the transceiver The power amplifier temperature can be monitored in the multi function meter TEMP gauge The IC 7700 has a screen saver function to protect the LCD from the burn in effect Push several times to close a multi func tion screen if necessary 2 Push F 7 SET to select set mode menu screen 3 Push F 3 DISP to enter display set mode 4 Push F 1 A F 2 V several times to select the Screen Saver Function item 5 Rotate the main dial to select the desired time pe riod for the screen saver acti
16. BE O 55555 SPLIT indicator lights e TX appears to show the transmit frequency readout 3 Set the transmit frequency to 21 310 MHz in the fol we lowing way Rotate the main dial while pushing XFC 14 07 36 e The transmit frequency can be monitored while push a ing XFC 4 Now you can receive on 21 290 MHz and transmit TFT on 21 310 MHZ SPLIT USB KE 1 e90 00 ANT To change the transmit and receive frequencies push to exchange the main and sub readouts Y CONVENIENT Ure 1408 e Direct shift frequency input ret lH aA i The shift frequency can be entered directly dh tr Push FINP ey PAMP VFO A i 2 Enter the desired shift frequency with the digit keys Te ons e 1 kHz to 1 MHz can be set 21 290 00 e When you require a negative shift direction push in advance 3 Push SPLIT e The shift frequency is input in the sub readout and the split function is turned ON Example To transmit on 1 kHz higher frequency SPLIT USB Push F INP gnr then SPLIT 1 21 310 00 To transmit on 3 kHz lower frequency Push FINP enr GENE _ then SPLIT e Split lock function Accidentally releasing XFC while rotating the main dial changes the receive frequency To prevent this use both the split lock and dial lock functions to change the transmit frequency only The split lock function can cels the
17. tone frequency e Push and hold F 4 DEF for 1 sec to select the default setting Push to return to the previous indication DD Mc e Available tone frequencies unit Hz 210 7 254 1 REPEATER TONE MEET T 50L TONE B 5Hz 4 33 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT E Tone squelch operation Socom a T S EG O 30 O gt S2 t eS sodo D 11 5149 UTC 11 51 USB VFO A FM FIL 1 29 650 00 ooo MEMORY SCAN REPEATER TONE T SOL TONE ME Sk z The tone squelch opens only when receiving a signal containing a matching subaudible tone You can silently wait for calls from group members using the same tone M Set the desired frequency band and select FM mode 2 Push TONE to turn the tone squelch function ON BEGIN appears 3 Push and hold TONE for 1 sec to tone frequency set mode 4 Push F 1 A or F 2 V to select T SQL TONE item Rotate the main dial to select the desired tone squelch frequency e Push and hold F 4 DEF for 1
18. O eo G oseS ss 7 4 Push several times to close a multi func tion screen if necessary 2 Push F 2 VOICE to call up the voice recorder screen e Previously selected screen TX or RX memory is dis played If the TX memory message T1 14 appears push F 7 T R to select RX memory message 3 Push F 1 or F 2 V to select the desired voice memory to playback 4 Push F 3 PLAY to start playback OJy indicators appear and the timer counts down 5 Push F 3 PLAY again to stop playback if desired e Playback is terminated automatically when all of the recorded contents in the message are played or after 30 sec 6 Push twice to exit the voice recorder Screen The previously recorded audio in message 1 can be played back without selecting voice recorder screen gt Push momentarily to play back the last 5 sec of the previously recorded audio e indicator appears e Playback is terminated automatically when all of the recorded contents in the message are played or after 5 sec e The playback time period can be set in voice set mode p 7 9 VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS 7 E Protect the recorded contents The protect function is available to protect the recorded contents from accidental erasure such as over writing etc
19. L A Be a 4 950 00 USE 4950 00 USB v i r i 2 14 100 00 USB RX MEMORY PLAY PROTECT CLA One touch recording COM m 200 200 om Slt I BE O gt 55 55 Sat VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS 7 Up to 20 receive voice memories are available in the IC 7700 A total audio length of up to 209 sec can be recorded in receive messages However the maximum recordable length into a single message is 30 sec This voice recorder records not only the received audio but also the information such as set operating frequency mode and the recording time for your fu ture reference GO Push several times to close a multi func tion screen if necessary 2 Select the desired mode 3 Push F 2 VOICE to call up the voice recorder screen e Previously selected screen TX or RX memory Is dis played If the TX memory channel T1 14 appears push F 7 T R to select RX memory channel 4 Push and hold for 1 sec to start recording e The operating frequency mode and current time are pro grammed as the memory names automatically Push momentarily to stop recording 7
20. O O SE 9575 5 18 This transceiver has auto and manual notch functions The auto notch function uses DSP to automatically at tenuate more than 3 beat tones tuning signals etc even if they are moving The manual notch can be set to attenuate a frequency via the NOTCH control The auto notch can be used in SSB AM and FM mode The manual notch can be used in SSB CW RTTY PSK and AM modes Push to toggle the notch function between auto manual and OFF in SSB and AM modes Push to turn the manual notch function ON and OFF in CW RTTY PSK modes Push to turn the auto notch function ON and OFF in FM mode NOTCH indicator above this switch lights green e Push and hold for 1 sec to select the notch fil ter width for manual notch from wide middle and nar row e Set to attenuate a frequency for manual notch via the NOTCH control EW appears when auto notch is in use Mi appears when manual notch is in use 7 While tuning the manual notch noise may be heard Y This comes from the DSP unit and does not indicate 7 an equipment malfunction The digital selector manually adjusts the center fre quency of the automatic pre selector The automatic pre selector adds selectivity ahead of the 1st mixer T
21. Push ABC MF6 abc MF6 123 MF7 or Sym bol MF7 to select the character group then rotate e RTTY memory edit screen the main dial to select the character or push the STE E keypad for number input ETOCS T 7 e abc MF6 appears when ABC MF6 is pushed when MYCALLYx3 ABC character group is selected and Symbol MF7 appears when 123 MF7 is pushed when 123 char de acter group is selected BEE SEAGE F ADIGE ETLAT e Selectable characters with the main dial Key selection Editable characters m A to Z capital letters a to z small letters B ei a memory name only Oe AH 00 koG Ax T3 OSLURS9A SL UH 599 599 BR OSL DE ICOM ICOM UR 599 595 BK TA DE URSSS OSL DE ICOM ICOM UR BK Pre programmed contents CH Name Contents RT1 MYCALLx2 JDE ICOM ICOM K MYCALLx3 IDE ICOM ICOM ICOM K QSLUR599 JQSL UR 599 599 BK DE UR599 JQSL DE ICOM ICOM UR 599 599 BK B E 0 to 9 numbers IHSNEVT TT At k gt 1_ Symbol For the memory contents set ting amp Jare selectable CQ CQ CQ JCQ CQ CQ DE ICOM ICOM ICOM Kd RIG amp ANT JMY TRANSCEIVER IS IC 7700 amp ANTENNA IS A 3 ELEMENT TRIBAND YAGI 2 For your convenience EQUIP MY RTTY EQUIPMENT IS When a PC keyboard is connected to USB con INTERNAL FSK UNIT amp nector on the front panel the RT TY memory con DEMODU
22. DF MIC aoa SE Q NOTCH 10 12 O clock LES G C C r TD O clock RF PWR Baho V4 Ct DEGI SEL Max clockwise va AGC SOL NR NE BE aes 12 o clock AGC JEGERE if azoa OS G SQ 1G amp Max counter AF AF yte clockwise MN Se ET ase om O O oo 0 OE ON O me AF CW PITCH Max counter 12 o clock clockwise RF Max clockwise 3 2 DRIVE COMP MONI GAIN VOX GAIN ANTI VOX 12 o clock E Selecting VFO memory mode EA com EEE 506 oO EE EX A SI EFE VFO indicator gn USE FIL2 14 100 00 bd 14 100 00 E VFO selection Selecting VFO A VFO B E com Gac 300 2009 EE PEN 10 VFO equalization E com O ic a 0 GE 0 o Oc
23. 0000 G00 00 O O an Ne I J Dia 2 ea eso 5 7 Timer action in the timer set screen must be se Y lected ON to enable timer operation described in Y page 11 3 steps SET MODE Section 12 E Set mode description savnede 12 2 Set mode PAN sek 12 2 Screen arrangement cceccecececeecesccesseeceeseesceeseeeness 12 3 E Level sel ModE EE EN SE 12 4 E ACC set mode 2 12 7 WE Display set mode sacsicctsvecinnesnneccnssdadndadsdencanscndedudenwsuas ssaanceeees 12 9 M Others set mode rranannennnnnnannannnannannennnannannennnannannnnnnsnee 12 12 E USB Memory set MENU rarannannennnannannnnnnannennnnanannennnsnnsnne 12 19 USB Memory set screen arrangement ranrnnnnannnnnnennnnnnr 12 19 Save option Set mode rranannannnnnnannannnnnnannennnannennnnnnsnnen 12 20 Load option set mode rarnnnnannnnnnnannnennnennnannnennnnnnnennnnnn 12 21 E File saving ook eee cece cece cece eee eee eee ee eeee eens tease eeateeeneeenneenanes 12 22 E File loading rrrnnrrnnnnennnnrnnnesnnnnannnennnnennnnnnnnsnnnennnnnnnneen 12 23 M Changing a file name rrarannnannnannnnnnrnnnnnnnenannnnnennnennnesnnen 12 24 M Deleting a file rarrrnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnsnnnenannennnennnnnnnnnennnnesnnenn 12 25 E Unmounting USB Memory _ 0 cece cece cee ce eee eeeeeaeeaeeneeeaeees 12 25 E Formatting the USB Memory _
24. GL UH 499 599 OR GEL DE icom leom WA 599 599 BK SPACE ie AUTO TX PT1 PT8 4 24 Pre set characters can be sent using the PSK memo ry Contents of the memory are set using the edit menu 1 During PSK mode operation push F 3eDECODE to select PSK decode screen 2 Push F 4 TX MEM to select PSK memory screen 3 Push F 7 1 4 5 8 to select memory bank then push one of the function keys F 1 PT1 to F 4 PT4 or F 1 PT5 to F 4 PT8 e When no keyboard is connected the selected memory contents will be transmitted immediately e When a keyboard is connected the memory contents will be transmitted immediately when function key is pushed or transmitted after F12 on the connected key board is pressed depending on auto transmission re ception setting see below e The transmission date time reception date and or time may be displayed in RX contents screen depending on setting 1 During PSK mode operation push F 3eDECODE to select PSK decode screen 2 Push F 4 TX MEM to select PSK memory screen then push F 6 EDIT to select PSK memory edit screen e PSK memory contents of Channel 1 PT1 is selected 3 Push F 7 PT1 PT8 several times to select the de sired RT TY memory 4 Push F 6 AUTO TX several times to select the de sired condition as follows e AUTO TX RX Automatically transmits the se lected memory and returns to re ceive afte
25. N sj 506 00 EE 2 ec C E3 GER NER NER GA E J O HL 1 4 tuning step OFF 1 4 tuning step ON 3 6 The operating frequency can be changed in larger steps 0 1 1 5 9 10 12 5 20 or 25 kHz selectable for quick tuning 1 Push TS to turn the quick tuning function ON e Y appears when the quick tuning function is ON 2 Rotate the main dial to change the frequency in pro grammed kHz steps 3 Push TS again to turn OFF the indicator 4 Rotate the main dial for normal tuning if desired 1 Push TS to turn the quick tuning function ON and OFF e Y appears when the quick tuning function ON 2 Push and hold TS for 1 sec to enter quick tuning step set mode e Selected tuning steps for all modes appear 3 Select the desired operating mode 4 Rotate the main dial to select the desired tuning step 5 Repeat steps 3 and to select quick tuning steps for other modes if desired 6 Push to exit the setting display 7 NOTE When entering quick tuning step set mode Y the quick tuning function must be activated first When operating in SSB data CW RTTY or PSK the 1 4 tuning function is available Dial rotation is reduced to 14 of norma
26. gt e To an ANT1 antenna 500 coaxial cable O O RF OUTPUT RF INPUT SEND O lt ALC O4 Non Icom linear amplifier INPUT2 Remote control cable supplied with the IC PW1 EURO Be sure to connect the cable Coaxial cable to the 7 pin ACC 2 jack supplied with the REMOTE IC PW1 EURO 1 Coaxial cable T Ground 2 8 ACC 1 ACC cable supplied with the IC PW1 EURO Connect INPUT 2 if necessary TJ Jug ante Up Ge Ge Ge GND INN mn _ 3 OA Hoo Transceiver Optional 7 WARNING Set the transceiver output power and linear ampli fier ALC output level after referring to the linear am plifier instruction manual The ALC input level must be in the range 0 V to 4 V The transceiver does not accept positive volt 77 age Non matched ALC and RF power settings 77 could overheat or damage the linear amplifier NO i i wa MM gr 7 The maximum signal level of RELAY jack is 7 16 V 0 5 ADC with initial setting and 250 V 200 mA 7 with MOSFET setting see p 12 8 for details Use Y an external relay unit if your non lcom linear ampli 7 fier requires control voltage and or current greater 77 than specified MOY INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS 2 E Transverter jack information j See gt wl BOO Oe Ge Oe ST oe e Wh
27. the application for details Rear panel view e When connecting to MIC e When using a TNC TNC or scan converter AF input PIT GND SQL input When using the VOX function no need to connect Refer to the instruction manual of the external equipment TNC etc When connecting the squelch line consult the necessary manual TNG etc Rear panel view 2 9 2 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS E Microphone connector information Front panel view AF output varies with AF GI Microphone input D GND NG D Microphone ground AN 2 8 V DC output GND PTT ground Oe So JJ 3 Frequency up down Se PTT Squelch switch E Microphones options SM 20 2 10 Eeg FUNCTION DESCRIPTION 8V DC output Max 10 mA Frequency down Ground through 470 Q Squelch closed High level CAUTION DO NOT short pin 2 to ground as this can damage the internal 8 V regulator NOTE DC voltage is applied to pin 1 for micro phone operation Use caution when using a non 7 Icom microphone S OM MAA AK UP DOWN SWITCHES UP DN Change the selected readout frequency or memory channel e Continuous pushing changes the frequency or memory channel number continuously e While pushing XFC the transmit readout frequency can be controlled while in split frequency operation e The UP DN swit
28. Push F 2 P to select the OFF cell then rotate the main dial to set the desired transceiver power OFF time e When using power ON timer only push F 4 CLR to se lect This setting cannot be set when the power ON timer is set to 9 Push F 2 P to select the Mch cell then rotate the main dial to select the desired memory channel number e If using the currently set VFO condition push F 4 CLR to select Push F 7 SET to set the timer e The timer indicator above switch lights green D Repeat steps 3 to 40 to set other timers if desired 2 Push to exit timer set screen Il CLOCK AND TIMERS E Setting sleep timer The sleep timer turns the transceiver power OFF au tomatically after passing the set period The timer can be set to 5 120 min in 5 min steps 7 The sleep timer function counts the minute units Y and does not count the second units For example 7 when the sleep timer is started at 12 00 59 first one Y minute past for just 1 sec That is way it has a max 7 59 sec error This is normal not a malfunction 1 Push EXIT SET several times to close a multi func tion screen if necessary 2 Push and hold TIMER for 1 sec to select timer set ew _ sc
29. Appears Counts down Transmit level setting DEF EI COM CO ESS 500 GI 200 ES SEN amp JS 6 ool oo om TX LEV EXIT SET Main dial F 6 VOICE RECORDER AGC T1 OO JASGYUA MID COMP OFF WIDE vse OFF PX MEMORY T1 T2 7 8 Push several times to close a multi func tion screen if necessary 2 Select a phone mode by pushing or AM FM 3 Push F 2 VOICE to call up the voice recorder screen e If the receive voice message appears push F 7 T R to select TX message T1 14 Push the desired message switch F 1 T1 to F 4 1T4 momentarily to transmit the contents e The transceiver transmits automatically e SEND indicator appears and the memory timer counts down e You hear the transmitted message from the speaker as the default This can be turned OFF in voice set mode p 7 9 G Push the selected message switch F 1 T1 to F 4 14 again to stop if desired e The transceiver returns to receive automatically when all of the recorded contents in the message are transmit ted 6 Push twice to exit the voice memory screen For your information When an external keypad is connected to EXT KEY
30. Push F 3 4 gt to select the desired part then ro tate the main dial to set the desired or specified IP address e 192 168 0 1 is the default setting 6 Push F 2 V to select Subnet Mask item 7 Rotate the main dial to set the desired or specified subnet mask e 255 255 255 0 is the default setting Push to turn the transceiver power OFF then ON to enable the IP address and subnet mask settings 16 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE Updating from the PC Click to start the IC 7700 HF 50MHz TRANSCEIVER Firm Utility CAUTION Updating the firmware is very risky If you make a mistake the IC 7700 may not operate properly and repair at Icom Inc Japan may be the only way to fix it You undertake the updating of the firmware at you own risk and responsibility Please refer to the firmware download homepage and or the instruction manual for the correct procedures in updating the firmware Also all preciously set conditions the memory contents etc will be lost when making a firmware update Making a backup file of programmed contents and settings onto the USB Memory before updating is recommended Do you agree to all of the above Click to continue IC 7700 HF 50MHz TRANSCEIVER Click to select the firmware file IC 200 800m Inc Eirrmmuararn Cila Nlama n Type the IC 7700 s IP address here Turn the IC 7700 power ON When the normal operational screen appears set the firmwa
31. SET MODE SET MODE MENU LEVEL TX Tone AX Tone Side Tone etc ACC ACC IN OUT Signal Levels etc DISP Style Font Pop up EXT Display etc TIME Clock OTHERS Other Items USB Load Save settings Update firmware Format USB Memory etc ACC DISP TIME OTHERS USB This set mode is used to set the waveform color sweeping speed scope range for fixed mode etc During spectrum scope display ON push lt gt WIDE i F 7 SET to select scope set mode screen e Push F 7 WIDE to toggle the screen size between nor mal and wide 2 Push F 1 A or F 2 V to select the desired set item 3 Set the desired condition using the main dial e Push and hold F 4 DEF for 1 sec to select the default condition or value e Push F 3 lt 4 gt to select the set contents for some Oo n O DEF EXIT SET items F 2 ET 4 Push EXIT SET to exit from set mode Max Hold CENTER Type Display Filter Genter Waveform Color Current _ Mn fr 241 mn mnd fl ra Wavelorm Color Max Hold ee 56 1110 147 Sweep Speed 25k MID i Sk MID 10k FAST 5 4 Scope set mode continued Scope during Tx CENTER Type Turn the transmitting signal waveform indicat
32. m_m SPECTRUM SCOPE CENTER TATT t hav 20 15 10 3 3 ATT MARKER HOLD CENT FIX MARKER HOLD CENT FIX 5 2 This DSP based spectrum scope allows you to display the conditions on the selected band as well as relative strengths of signals The IC 7700 has two modes for the spectrum indication one is center mode and an ther one is fixed mode In addition the IC 7700 has a mini scope screen to save screen space Displays signals around the set frequency within the selected span The set frequency is always displayed at the center of the screen Push several times to close a multi func tion screen if necessary 2 Push F 1 SCOPE to select the scope screen 3 Push F 5 CENT FIX to select the center mode AIMA is displayed when center mode is selected 4 Push F 1 SPAN several times to select the scope span e 2 5 5 0 10 25 50 100 and 250 kHz are avail able e Push and hold F 1 SPAN for 1 sec to return to 2 5 kHz span e Sweeping speed is selectable for each span indepen dently in scope set mode pgs 5 5 5 6 5 Push F 2 ATT several times to activate an attenu ator or turn the attenuator OFF e 10 20 and 30 dB attenuators are available e Push and hold F 2 ATT for 1 sec to turn OFF the at tenuator 6 Push F 3 MARKER to turn the marker for transmit frequency ON or OFF Gm displays the marker at the transmit freque
33. 5 Push EXIT SET to return to Scan menu HIGH HIGH scanis faster LOW scan is slower ON e ON When detecting a signal scan pauses for 10 sec then resumes When a signal disap pears scan resumes 2 sec later e OFF When detecting a signal cancels scanning Q SCANS E ds hand scan an PROG SQL VFO A USB FIL2 1 IPER O SCAN SCAN Z ness PT 0 500 00 MHz P2 29 999 99 MHz Recall 14 195 00 N FINE 4F SPAN E AF scan aba RECALL AF SCAN SQL VFO A USB FIL2 TE SCAN SCAN gt 3 Gney 195 00 MHz 4F Span 10 kHz Recall 14 195 00 MHz FINE 4F SPAN RECALL O 11 1048 UTC 11 10 USB SET 9 4 GO Push several times to close a multi func tion screen if necessary 2 Select VFO mode 3 Select the desired operating mode e The operating mode can also be changed while scan ning 4 Pus
34. SHIFT FREQUENCY INDICATOR p 5 12 Shows the shift frequency of the IF filter BAND WIDTH INDICATOR p 5 12 Shows the passband width of the IF filter BANDPASS FILTER INDICATOR Appears when the narrow filter 500 Hz or less is selected during CW RT TY or PSK31 operation PASSBAND WIDTH INDICATOR p 5 12 Graphically displays the passband width for twin PBT operation and center frequency for IF shift op eration NOTCH INDICATOR p 5 18 MN appears when the manual notch function is in use This function is available in SSB CW RTTY PSK and AM modes PW appears when the auto notch function is in use This function is available in SSB AM and FM modes RTTY TUNING INDICATOR Shows the tuning condition in RT TY mode APF TPF INDICATOR J3 appears when the audio peak filter func tion is in use This function is available in CW mode p 4 6 HJ appears when the twin peak filter function is in use This function is available in RT TY mode p 4 14 CLOCK READOUT Shows the current time Local and UTC time can be indicated at the same time USB MEMORY INDICATOR Appears when USB Memory is connected and blinks while reading or writing the USB Memory RIT INDICATOR Appears when RIT function is in use ATX INDICATOR Appears when ATX function is in use RIT ATX SHIFT FREQUENCY INDICATOR Shows the shift frequency for the RIT or ATX func tion
35. 6 Push F 1 or F 2 to move the cursor back wards or forwards respectively e Pushing F 3 DEL deletes a character and F 4 SPACE inserts a space 7 Repeat steps 5 and to input the desired charac ters Push to set the contents and exit PSK memory edit screen 4 25 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT PSK decode set mode DIO NSF C Ja Se MA ying p PSK FFT neper Wave form Color PSK AFG Range PSK Time Stamp PSK Time Stamp Time PSK Time Stamp Frequency PSK Font Color Receive PSK Font Color Transmit 1128 I S755 1128 1106 255 1106 i 7 WIDE PSK FFT Scope Averaging Select the FFT scope waveform averaging function from 2 to 4 and OFF default OFF PSK FFT Scope Waveform Color Set the color for the FFT scope waveform e The color is set in RGB format e The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale PSK AFC Range Select the AFC Automatic Frequency Control func tion operating range from 15 Hz default and 8 Hz PSK Time Stamp Turn the time stamp date transmission or reception time display ON and OFF PSK Time Stamp Time Selects the clock display for time stamp usage
36. METZ 0 to 9 numerals Symbol MF7 I 4 amp 1 O can be selected e Push F 1 4 to move the cursor left push F 2 P to move the cursor right push F 3 DEL to delete G o o vey EDIT EXIT SET F4 USB MEMORY SET E USB MEMORY MENU LOAD Load memory and se ae for setup SAVE FIRM UP FORMAT UNMOUNT Save your memory and settings Update the firmware of CPUs and DSPs Format the USB Memory in FAT FAT32 for 16 7700 Unimount the USB Memory to remove safely SAVE FIRM UP FORMAT UNMOUNT a character and push F 4 SPACE to insert a space ane Push to set the file name e Save option WIDE 1 Push F 5 OPTION to enter save option set VSC mode 406008 FLE nave ME 2 Push F 1 A or F 2 to select the item DIR FILE EDIT OPTION SAVE WIDE then rotate the main dial to select the desired setting see p 12 20 for details e Text is the default setting e Push and hold F 4 DEF for 1 sec to select the default setting Push to return to the previous indi SETTING 493 048 FILE NAME eSETO1 NG cation SPAGE WIDE j e Saving location En amen i 1 Push F 1 DIR FILE to select tree view ar screen an en 2 Select the desired directory or folder in the FREE I 493 MB SPACE USB Memory e Push F 4 gt to select the upper directory e Push F 2 A or F 3 W to select folder in the
37. cece cece cece eee ee eee tease eeeeneeenaeeeas 3 6 Selecting 1 Hz step ow cece c cece eee ee cece eee eeeeeaeeaeeaeeeaeeas 3 7 Auto tuning step function cece ccc cece eee e ence cease eeneeeaeeeeaees 3 7 Band edge warning beep rrnnrrnnenannnnnennnennnennnenanennnennnnsnne 3 7 M Operating mode selection anrrnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnsnnnnnsnnnnnsnen 3 8 E Volume setting EE EE EE rnrn rrenen 3 9 E RF gain adjustment cece ecceee cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeseeneeaeeanengens 3 9 WE Squelch level adjustment ccccceceeceec cece eeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeneaes 3 9 ME Meter indication selection a rrunnvannrnnnvannennvnnnvennennuvennnenner 3 10 Q Multi function digital meter cicccuserstveneietecataatimestiasacinsdamsecvs 3 10 Meter type selection rnanrrnannnnnnnannvenannennnennnnnnnnnennnesnne 3 11 WE Voice synthesizer operation ruanruunvunnrnnvnnnnennvennnnnnvennnenner 3 11 WE Basic transmit operation ursine Guns womeaunnasnwssicnanain 3 12 SJEL EEE 3 12 Microphone gain adjustment ccc ccc e ese e eee e eee eeaeeeeeeaees 3 12 Drive gain adjusStMent sececsicac ectecnnnctasetencuesannemmdunsasenecnaninns 3 13 3 1 3 BASIC OPERATIONS E When first applying power CPU resetting HK I i ES TS gt 20 0 POWER oa ETEOET 30 200 ao Moc NE UO 35 555530 O
38. 7 When using a paddle rotate KEY SPEED to adjust ZY the keying speed 6 FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT E ATX function RIT ATX om hg il OC O U Dr J Oovoooc0o oon ow ie 71000000 C A j JE O S555555 XFC E Monitor function Sosa zen 30 BES oeae O O 30 O gt S A owe a CICIJCIJCIJCIC IC 0 ey O OTTO ow MONI GAIN 6 4 The ATX function shifts the transmit frequency up to 9 999 kHz in 1 Hz steps 10 Hz steps when cancelling the 1 Hz step readout without moving the receive fre quency Push ATX Ma appears 2 Rotate RIT ATX G To reset the ATX frequency push and hold CLEAR for 1 sec e Push momentar
39. Displays the time stamp No time stamp indication Transmits CR LF code once Transmits no CR LF code Local e Local Selects the time that set in Time Now e UTC Selects the time that set in CLOCK2 The name of choice may differ according to CLOCK2 Name setting p 11 2 UTC is the default name of CLOCK2 OFF e ON Displays the operating frequency e OFF No operating frequency display a oe 128 e Push F 3 lt 4 gt to select R Red G Green and B Blue and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255 e Push F 3 lt 4 gt to select R Red G Green and B Blue and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255 e Push F 3 lt 4 gt to select R Red G Green and B Blue and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255 CJ 255 e Push F 3 lt 4 gt to select R Red G Green and B Blue and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT Data saving The USB Memory is not supplied by Icom OPTION F 5 Decode file save screen AGC DECODE FILE SAVE MID 1 4 OFF Ve OFF 4
40. NOTE The time won t be displayed when OFF is selected in PSK Time Stamp as above 4 26 This set mode is used to set the decode USOS func tion time stamp setting etc e Setting contents 1 During PSK mode operation push F 3eDECODE to select PSK decode screen 2 Push F 1 lt MENU1 gt to select PSK decode second menu then push F 6 SET to select PSK decode set mode e Push F 7 WIDE to toggle the screen size from normal and wide 3 Push F 1 A or F 2 V to select the desired set item 4 Set the desired condition using the main dial e Push and hold F 4 DEF for 1 sec to select a default condition or value e Push F 3 lt 4 gt to select the set contents for some items 5 Push to exit from set mode OFF Recommendation If you use the FFT scope waveform for tuning using the default or smaller number setting is recom mended Mmm ae 153 mms 255 e Push F 3 lt 4 gt to select R Red G Green and B Blue and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255 15Hz NOTE The AFC function may not tune the signal properly when a weak PSK signal is received ON ON _ Displays the time stamp e OFF No time stamp display Local Selects the time that set in Time Now Selects the time that set in CLOCK2 The name of choice may differ according to CLOCK2 Name setting p 11 2 UTC is the default name of CLOCK2 e Local
41. This selects which of the four memories will contain the contest serial number exchange The count up trigger allows the serial number to automatically in crement after each complete serial number exchange is sent Present Number This item shows the current number for the count up trigger channel set above 4 10 This menu is used to set the contest serial number and count up trigger etc e Setting contents 1 During CW mode operation push F 3 eKEYER to select memory keyer screen 2 Push to select memory keyer menu then push F 3 001 to select contest serial number set mode 3 Push F 1 A or F 2 V to select the desired set item 4 Set the desired condition using the main dial e Push and hold F 4 DEF for 1 sec to select the default condition or value 5 Push twice to normal screen Normal e Normal Does not use short morse numbers default Sets 1 as A 9 as N and 0 as O Sets 1 as A 9 as N and 0 as T Sets 9 as N and 0 as O Sets 9 as N and 0 as T e 190 gt ANO e 190 gt ANT e 90 gt NO e 90 gt NT M2 e M1 M2 M3 and M4 can be set default M2 001 e Rotate the main dial to change the number or push and hold F 3 001CLR for 1 sec to reset the cur rent number to 001 Keyer set mode ET com ERE 20 200 Oo Green 8 i 3E oo dodo 0030
42. VY When re packing and shipping the transceiver Attach the rack mounting handles using original screws when re packing and shipping the transceiver at any time Select a location for the transceiver that allows ade quate air circulation free from extreme heat cold or vibrations and away from TV sets TV antenna ele ments radios and other electromagnetic sources The base of the transceiver has an adjustable feet for desktop use Set the feet to one of two angles de pending on your operating preference 2 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS E Grounding e o amp Oe Oe Be E Antenna connection PL 259 CONNECTOR INSTALLATION EXAMPLE 30 mm i ina Coupling ring 10 mm soft solder 2 10 mm FAH Soft solder 1 2 mm solder solder 30 mm in 10mm 3 in 1 2 mm Slide the coupling ring down Strip the cable jacket and in the braid Strip the cable as shown at left Tin the center conductor Slide the connector body on and solder it Screw the coupling ring onto the connector body 146 in To prevent electrical shock television interference TVI broadcast interference BCI and other prob lems ground the transceiver through the GROUND terminal on the rear panel For best results connect a heavy gauge wire or strap to a long earth sunk copper rod Make the distance be tween the GND terminal and ground a
43. ccccc ccc ece eee e ee eee seat eaeeeeees 12 26 12 1 12 SET MODE E Set mode description Set mode operation USB EE ICOM EE SET MODE MENU LEVEL TX Tone AX Tone Side Tone etc ACC LACCI IN OUT Signal Levels ete DISP Style Font Pop up EXT Display ete TIME Clock OTHERS Other Items USB Laad Save settings Update firmware Format US8 Me emory etc LEVEL ACC DIEP TIME OTHERS USB Set mode is used for programming infrequently changed values or conditions of functions The IC 7 00 has a level set mode display set mode time set mode accessory set mode Others set mode and USB Memory set menu Push several times to close a multi func tion screen if necessary 2 Push F 7 SET to select set mode menu screen e Pushing and holding for 1 sec also selects set mode menu screen 3 Push F 1 LEVEL F 2 ACC F 3 DISP F 4 TIME F 5OTHERSJ or F 7 USB to enter the desired set mode 4 For level accessory display and Others set mode push F 7 WIDE to toggle wide and normal screen 5 Push F 1 A or F 2 V to select the desired item then rotate the main dial to adjust select the desired value or condition e Pushing F 3 lt 4 P operation may be necessary for some i
44. e TX indicator lights red 6 Type from the connected keyboard to enter the message that you want to transmit e The typewritten contents are indicated in the TX buffer screen and transmitted immediately e The text color will be changed when transmitted e Press one of F1 F8 to transmit the TX memory con tents 7 Press F12 of the keyboard to return to receive v For your convenience The transmission contents can be typed before being transmitted 1 Perform the steps to above 2 Type from the connected keyboard to enter the message that you want to transmit e The message is shown in the TX buffer screen 3 Press F12 of the connected keyboard to transmit the message e The color of displayed text in the TX buffer screen will be changed when transmitted e To cancel the transmission press F12 twice 4 Press F12 of the keyboard to return to receive 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT Convenient functions for receive e Preamp p 5 9 Push P AMP MF3 several times to set the pre amp OFF preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON e P AMP1 or P AMP2 appears when the preamp 1 or preamp 2 is ON e Attenuator p 5 9 Push ATT MF4 several times to set the attenu ator in 6 dB steps e Push and hold ATT MF4 for 1 sec to turn the atten uator function OFF e ATT and attenuation level appear when the attenu ator is ON e Noise blanker p 5 16 Push to turn the noise blank
45. e Previously recorded contents are cleared e Audio output from the internal speaker is automatically muted G While speaking into the microphone with your nor mal voice level adjust the MIC control so that the MIC REC LEVEL indicator reads within 100 Push F 4 REC momentarily to stop recording e The recording is terminated automatically when the re maining time becomes 0 sec 9 Push twice to exit the voice recorder screen 1 Perform the steps to as 9 Recording above 2 Push F 1 A or F 2 V to select the desired mes sage 3 Push F 3 PLAY to playback the recorded contents e indicator appears 4 Push F 3 PLAY again to stop playback e Playback is terminated automatically when all of the recorded contents in the message are played 6 Push twice to exit the voice recorder screen E Programming a memory name e Voice memory name editing example VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS 7 Memory messages can be tagged with alphanumeric names of up to 20 characters each Capital letters small letters numerals some symbols C ERSa 8 54 H 5 lt gt _ and spaces can be used See the table below 1 Record a message as described in page 7 6 2 During the
46. 10 1 10 ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION E Antenna connection and selection EI fcom OE TG 50 OF e Antenna selection mode Auto 3 5 7 MHz 21 28 MHz 50 MHz bands bands bands RX only eo 6090 EPO INNE ANTE ANTS a UUI0OIODI0IOUII a e Antenna selection mode Manual E com EEE S eu gt eS 0000000 7 Coc e Antenna selection mode OFF 10 2 The IC 7700 has 4 antenna connectors for the HF 50 MHz bands ANT1 ANT2 ANT3 and ANT 4 For each operating band the IC 7700 covers there is a band memory which can memorize the selected an tenna When you change the operating frequency out side of a band the previously used antenna is auto matically selected see below for the new band This function allows automatic switching of 4 separate an tennas for HF and 50 MHz bands
47. 4 1 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT E Operating SSB MIC TX indicator RX indicator Band keys co OF eS 2 80 es SS SS SSS pie ox AF Appears VFO A USB FIL2 14 100 00 1 m a oo Convenient functions for receive e Preamp p 5 9 Push P AMP MF3 several times to set the pre amp OFF preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON e P AMP1 or P AMP2 appears when the preamp 1 or preamp 2 is ON respectively Attenuator p 5 9 Push ATT MF4 several times to set the attenu ator in 6 dB steps e Push and hold ATT MF4 for 1 sec to turn the attenuator function OFF e ATT and attenuation level appear when the attenu ator is ON e Noise blanker p 5 16 gt Push to turn the noise blanker ON and OFF and then rotate NB control to adjust the threshold level e Noise blanker indicator above switch lights when the noise blanker is ON e Push and hold NB _ for 1 sec to enter noise blanker set mode e Twin PBT passband tuning p 5 12 Rotate TWIN PBT controls inner outer e PBT indicator above switch lights when PBT is in use e Push and hold for 1 sec to clear the settings e Audio tone control p 12 4 Push F 7 SET then F 1 LEVEL to enter level set mode S
48. 493 0M8 RX OT 0201 WAV DIR FILE EDIT Saving the TX memory The recorded RX memory contents can be saved into the USB Memory 1 During voice recorder RX memory screen display push F 6 SAVE to select voice file save screen e Previously selected screen TX or RX memory is dis played If the TX message T1 14 appears push F 7 T R to select RX message 2 Change the following conditions if desired e File name 1 Push F 4 EDIT to select file name edit con dition e Push F 1 DIR FILE several times to select the file name if necessary Push ABC MF6 123 MF7 or Symbol MF7 to select the character group then ro tate the main dial to select the character e ABC MF6 A to Z capital letters 123 EZ 0 to 9 numerals Symbol MF7 amp 1 O can be selected e Push F 1 4 to move the cursor left push F 2 P to move the cursor right push F 3 DEL to delete a character and push F 4 SPACE to insert a space Push to set the file name e Saving location 1 Push F 1 DIR FILE to select tree view screen Select the desired directory or folder in the USB Memory e Push F 4 lt 4 gt to select the upper directory e Push F 2 or F 3 V to select folder in the same directory e Push and hold F 4 gt for 1 sec to select a folder in the directory e Push F 5 REN DEL to rename the folder e Push and hold F 5 REN DEL for 1 sec to delete
49. 5 346500 5 366500 5 371500 5 403500 7 000000 7 300000 10 100000 10 150000 14 000000 14 350000 18 068000 18 168000 21 000000 21 450000 24 890000 24 990000 28 000000 29 700000 50 000000 54 000000 Some frequency ranges are not guaranteed Depending on versions SUSA version only USB LSB CW RTTY PSK31 AM FM 101 99 regular 2 scan edges SO 239x4 antenna impedance 50 Q 0 C to 50 C 32 F to 122 F Less than 0 05 ppm approx 5 min after from turn the main power I O ON 0 50 C 32 122 F 1 Hz 85 265 V AC universal input 200 VA typical 210 VA typical 800 VA 425x149x437 mm 16232x57 8x lt 1772 in Approx 22 5 kg 50 Ib 8 pin DIN connector 7 pin DIN connector 7 inch diagonal TFT color LCD 800x480 D sub 15S 2 conductor 3 5 d mm 1 D sub 9 pin USB Universal Serial Bus 1 1 2 0x2 5 200 W 5 50 W P S N modulation Low power modulation Phase modulation More than 60 dB HF bands More than 70 dB 50 MHz band More than 63 dB More than 80 dB 9 999 kHz 8 pin connector 600 Q 3 conductor 6 35 d mm 1 4 3 conductor 6 35 d mm 1 4 Phono RCA Phono RCA 19 2 Downloaded by SPECIFICATIONS AND OPTIONS 15 RadioAmateur EU Receiver e Receive system e Intermediate frequencies 1st 2nd e Sensitivity typical Double conversion superheter
50. AKITA ANT SW ANT TYPE hi BPF 10 120 00 i 1 14 195 00 USB ANT ANT MEMORY ANT MA ANT MW TEMP M ANT Switeh Auto Push to select the antenna selection mode The antenna temporary memory memorizes the man ually selected antenna The selected antenna will be re called even if frequency band has been changed 1 Select the antenna set screen 2 Push F 4 TEMP M to turn the temporary memory ON and OFF 3 Select the desired frequency band with a band key 4 Push ANT MF1 to select the desired antenna e X appears when a different antenna from the original is selected Push F 1 ANT MR to re call the original antenna e X disappears 6 Push EXIT SET to exit antenna set screen 7 CAUTION Before transmitting with the manually selected antenna make sure the selected antenna suits the operating frequency Otherwise the trans ceiver may be damaged SSN The automatic antenna selection antenna memory and the ANT MF1 switch function can be deactivated if desired 1 Select the antenna set screen 2 Push F 6 ANT SW to select the antenna selec tion from Auto OFF and Manual e Auto Use the antenna memory Antenna selec tion with ANT switch is also available OFF Only the antenna connected to ANT 1 can be used ANT switch is deactivated e Manual Deactivate the antenna memory function Antenna can be selected with ANT switch operati
51. RadioAmateur EU EE EE 3 EJ AUTO TUNE VOICE MEMORY TIMER SWITCH p 11 4 Turns the sleep or daily timer function ON and OFF e The TIMER indicator above this switch lights green when the timer is in use Enters timer set mode when pushed and held for 1 sec HEADPHONE JACK PHONES Accepts standard stereo headphones e Output power 5 mW with an 8 load e When headphones are connected the internal speaker or connected external speaker does not function ELECTRONIC KEYER JACK ELEC KEY p 2 5 Accepts a paddle to activate the internal electronic keyer for CW operation e You can select internal electronic keyer bug key or straight key operation in keyer set mode p 4 12 e A straight key jack is located on the rear panel See CW KEY on p 1 12 e Keyer polarity dot and dash can be reversed in keyer set mode p 4 12 e 4 channel memory keyer is available for your conve nience p 4 8 MICROPHONE CONNECTOR MIC Accepts an optional microphone e See p 15 4 for appropriate microphones e See p 2 10 for microphone connector information MIC GAIN CONTROL MIC p 3 12 Adjusts microphone input gain e The transmit audio tone in SSB AM and FM modes can be adjusted independently in set mode p 12 5 How to set the microphone gain Set the MIC control so that the ALC meter occasionally moves up scale during normal voice transmission i
52. Sk 10dB SPECTRUM SCOPE CENTER Grid 25k iss s Tr EE b s MARKER ATT HOLD CENT FIX 5 3 FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE 5 Displays signals within the specified frequency range The selected frequency band conditions can be ob served at a glance when using this mode Push several times to close a multi func tion screen if necessary 2 Push F 1 SCOPE to select the scope screen 3 Push F 5 CENT FIX to select the fixed mode Maya is displayed when fixed mode is selected 4 Push F 2 ATT several times to activate an attenu ator or turn the attenuator OFF e 10 20 and 30 dB attenuators are available e Push and hold F 2 ATT for 1 sec to turn OFF the at tenuator Push F 3eMARKER several times to select the marker for transmit frequency or turn the marker OFF E displays the marker at the receive frequency al ways displayed gm displays the marker at the transmit frequency e lt lt or gt gt appears when the marker is out of range e The spectrum scope shows the transmit signal wave form while transmitting This can be deactivated in scope set mode p 5 5 e The spectrum scope shows the peak level holding func tion Peak levels are displayed in the background of the current spectrum in a different color until the receive fre quency changes This can be deactivated and the wave form color can be set in scope set mode p 5 5 6 Push F 4 HOL
53. V SFT 0 Convenient functions for receive e Preamp p 5 9 Push P AMP MF3 several times to set the pre amp OFF preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON e P AMP1 or P AMP2 appears when the preamp 1 or preamp 2 is ON e Auto notch filter p 5 18 Push to turn the auto notch function ON and OFF e Notch indicator above switch lights when the auto notch is ON Convenient functions for transmit e VOX voice operated transmit p 6 2 gt Push to turn the VOX function ON and OFF e appears when the VOX function is ON Transmit quality monitor p 6 4 Push to turn the monitor function ON and OFF e Rotate MONI GAIN to adjust the monitor gain e Monitor indicator above switch lights when the monitor function is ON 4 31 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 1 Push a band key to select the desired band 2 Push to select FM e FM indicator appears After FM mode is selected push to toggle be tween FM and AM modes 3 Rotate the main dial to tune to the desired fre quency e The S meter indicates received signal strength when signal is received e 10 kHz tuning step is preset for the FM mode e Push several times to select the desired filter width 4 Rotate AF to set audio to a comfortable listening level Push or PTT microphone to transmit e The TX indicator lights red 6 Speak into the microphone at your normal voice level e Adjust the microphone ga
54. e 1 to 60 sec in 1 sec steps can be selected default 2 sec 1 1 3 0 e 1 1 2 8 to 1 1 4 5 in 0 1 steps can be selected default 1 1 3 0 4ms e 2 4 6 or 8 msec can be selected default 4 msec to be continued 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT Keyer set mode continued This item sets the paddle polarity e Normal and reverse polarity can be selected This item selects the keyer type for ELEC KEY con e ELEC KEY BUG KEY and Straight key can be se nector on the front panel lected default ELEC KEY This item allows you to set the microphone UP DN e ON UP DN switches can be used for CW keys to be used as a paddle OFF UP DN switches cannot be used for CW NOTE When ON is selected the frequency and memory channel cannot be changed using the UP DN switches 4 12 E Operating RTTY FSK TX indicator RX indicator Band keys LJL Appears BW 500 SFT 0 BPF O gr 14 100 000 1 ATTY DECODE Og 4 D FU HOLD CLR TX MEM K TX buffer screen FFT scope RX contents screen Water fall A 2125 170 ST 1 WDE 4 13 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT A DSP based high quality Baudot RT TY encoder de coder is built in to the IC 7700 When c
55. e List of Country codes ISO 3166 1 country __ Codesf om Codes Austria Liechtenstein Belgium Lithuania Bulgaria Luxembourg Croatia Malta Czech Republic Netherlands Cyprus Norway Denmark Poland Estonia Portugal Romania Slovakia Slovenia Finland France Germany Greece Spain Hungary Sweden Iceland Switzerland Ireland Turkey Italy United Kingdom Latvia ABOUT CE O DECLARATION ICOM OF CONFORMITY We Icom Inc Japan 1 1 32 Kamiminami Hirano ku C C1 Osaka 547 0003 Japan Dusseldorf 16th Nov 2007 Place and date of issue Declare on our sole responsibility that this equipment complies with the essential requirements of the Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive 1999 5 EC and that any applicable Essential Test Suite measurements have been performed pet eGo Sule Himmelgeister straBe 100 Kind of equipment HF 50 MHz ALL MODE TRANSCEIVER p 40225 D sseldorf Type designation IC 7700 Authorized EPLE name EEE H Ikegami General Manager Version where applicable This compliance is based on conformity with the following harmonised standards specifications or documents i EN 301489 1 v1 4 1 2002 08 ii EN 301489 15 v1 2 1 2002 08 iv EN 60950 1 2001 A11 2004 Icom Inc Please record the serial number of your IC 7700 transceiver below for future servicing reference Serial Number Date of purchase Place where purchased Count
56. COMP setting 0 max CCW to 255 max CW DELAY setting 0 max CCW to 255 max CW AGC control setting 0 max CCW to 255 max CW NB control setting 0 max CCW to 255 max CW DIGI SEL setting 0 max CCW to 255 max CW DRIVE setting 0 max CCW to 255 max CW MONI GAIN setting 0 max CCW to 255 max CW VOX GAIN setting 0 max CCW to 255 max CW ANTI VOX setting 0 max CCW to 255 max CW 14 CONTROL COMMAND Command table continued 1A 03 18 Level data CONTRAST setting 0 max CCW to 255 max CW 19 Level data BRIGHT setting 0 max CCW to 255 max CW Read squelch condition Read S meter level Read RF power meter Read SWR meter Read ALC meter Read COMP meter Read Vb meter Read ID meter Send read Preamp setting 0 OFF 1 preamp 1 2 preamp 2 Send read AGC selection 0 OFF 1 Slow 2 Mid 3 Fast Send read noise blanker setting 0 OFF 1 ON Send read Audio peak filter set ting for CW mode APF type SHARP 0 OFF 1 320 Hz 2 160 Hz 3 80 Hz APF type SOFT 0 OFF 1 WIDE 2 MID 3 NAR Send read noise reduction setting 0 OFF 1 ON Send read auto notch setting 0 OFF 1 ON Send read repeater tone setting 0 OFF 1 ON Send read tone squelch setting 0 OFF 1 ON Send read speech compressor setting 0 OFF 1 ON Send read monitor setting 0 OFF 1 ON Send read VOX function setting 0 OFF 1 ON Send read Break in function set ting 0 OFF 1 semi
57. More sensitive and confirm proper operation LCD CONTRAST CONTROL CONTRAST Adjusts the LCD contrast High mm Push C contrast Low contrast LCD BRIGHTNESS CONTROL BRIGHT Adjusts the LCD brightness rust GB Bright amp AUTOMATIC TUNING SWITCH AUTOTUNE p 5 19 Turns the automatic tuning function ON and OFF in CW and AM modes IMPORTANT When receiving a weak signal or receiving a sig nal with interference the automatic tuning func tion may tune the receiver to an undesired signal 1 PANEL DESCRIPTION E Front panel continued 6 O QO ee asec eee es 1 TWIN PBT i Ai AS NY I I I I I een RTTY PSK ies AM FM o DATA M SCOPE EXIT SET TUNE amp MULTI FUNCTION SWITCHES Push to select the functions indicated in the LCD display to the right of these switches e Functions vary depending on the operating condition MF1 MULTI FUNCTION 1 SWITCH nn gt Selects the antenna connector from ANT1 ANT2 ANT3 and ANT4 when pushed p 10 2 Displays antenna selection memory when pushed and held for 1 sec e When the receive antenna is activated the antenna connected to ANT4 is used for receive only 7 When a transverter is in use this ANT 7 does not function and TRV appears MF2 MULTI FUNCTION 2 SWITCH Selects RF power Po SWR ALC Po COMP Vb or ID metering during trans mit
58. N I T et S O O O rT rT No need to enter for transverter offset frequency setting TTransverter offset only Fix to 0 for split offset setting ji N L a Repeater tone tone squelch frequency setting The following data sequence is used when sending or reading the tone frequency setting D Po o x x xix 1 kHz 0 9 gt 100 Hz 0 fixed gt 1 MHz 0 9 gt x 1 kHz 0 9 gt 100 Hz 0 fixed gt x 10 kHz 0 9 gt x 1 MHz 0 9 x Lower edge Higher edge Data mode with filter width setting The following data sequence is used when sending or reading the data mode with filter width setting Fixed digit 0 gt Fixed digit 0 gt 100Hz digit 0 2 gt 10 Hz digit 0 9 gt 1 Hz digit 0 9 gt 0 1 Hz digit 0 9 gt Not necessary when setting a frequency SSB transmission passband width 00 Data mode OFF setting 01 FIL1 The following data sequence is used when sending or Sie reading the SSB transmission passband width setting 00 Data mode OFF 01 Data mode 1 D1 am Lower edge 0 100 Hz 02 Data mode 2 D2 1 200 Hz 03 Data mode 3 D3 2 300 Hz 3 500 Hz hA th Antenna memory setting 2 2800 Hz The following codes are used when sending or read 3 2900 Hz ing the antenna memory setting 0 ANT1 1 ANT2 2 ANT3 3 ANT4 4 TX ANT1 RX ANT4 5 TX ANT2 RX ANTA 6 TX ANT3
59. PAD the recorded message T1 14 can be transmit ted without opening the voice recorder screen See page 2 7 for details 1 Call up the voice recorder screen as described as above 2 Push F 6 TX LEV to select the voice memory transmit level set condition 3 Push the desired message switch F 1 T1 to F 4 1 4 momentarily to transmit the contents e The transceiver transmits automatically e SEND indicator appears and the memory timer counts down 4 Rotate the main dial to adjust the transmit voice level e Push and hold F 7 DEF for 1 sec to select the default condition Push to return to the voice recorder screen E Voice set mode COM ESTES 30 GI E EP EE NS EE HE Ol SYSE Auto Monitor Turn the automatic monitor function for recorded audio contents transmission Short Play Time Set the desired time period for the one touch playing when is pushed momentarily Normal Rec Time Set the desired time period for the for one touch recording when is pushed momentarily 7 9 7 VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS Sets the automatic monitor function short play and normal recording times for voice recorder Push several
60. aarrnnnannnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennne 4 18 SO SAVING ER EE 4 20 E Operating PSK er 4 21 Convenient functions for receive oo kee cece c eee ee ee eeeeeeeneeeeas 4 22 About BPSK and QPSK modes ccccece eee ee ences eeeeeeenes 4 22 Functions for the PSK decoder indication ccece ences 4 23 Setting the decoder threshold level c ccc cece cece cece eee eees 4 23 PSK memory transmission Jeccnseocndssacksmadeadceteansetectandeanaceenes 4 24 Automatic transmission reception setting r rrrnnnennnnennnenr 4 24 SEPT eee 4 25 PSK decode set mode rranrnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnsnnennnnnnnesnne 4 26 BELE GEL EE EE 4 28 E Operating AN nee eee eee eee eee ee ere ree 4 29 Convenient functions for receive oo occ ccc c eee ee ee ee seat eeeeeeas 4 29 Convenient functions for transmit cece cece cece eee eee eaees 4 30 BO EN are EE E EEE 4 31 Convenient functions for receive oo kee e cece eee e eee eee teat cnet enes 4 31 Convenient functions for transmit c cece cece neces eeee eae es 4 31 WE Repeater operation avin citenoucesecaensrsumendeondenenrenevcenienansiurneocnern 4 32 Repeater tone frequency setting annrunnrannrnnvenanennvennnenner 4 33 M 1006 squelch operation cisiuiececaussesmaiicenaeastewnavoerdeasnadmeoeeutn 4 34 M Data mode AFSK operation aanrrnnrnnnvnnnrnnvnnnvennnrnavennnsnnnr 4 35
61. again to turn the NET function ON Nap appears additionally Push and hold F 3 AFC NET for 1 sec to add the offset frequency to the displayed frequency 9 Push F 7 WIDE to toggle the PSK decode screen size from normal and wide e S RF meter type during wide screen indication can be selected in display set mode pgs 3 11 12 10 Push to close the PSK decode screen Adjust the PSK decoder threshold level if some char acters are displayed when no signal is received 1 Call up the PSK decode screen as described above 2 Push F 5 ADJ to select the threshold level setting condition 3 Rotate the main dial to adjust the PSK decoder threshold level e Push and hold F 6 DEF for 1 sec to select the default setting 4 Push F 5 ADJ to exit from the threshold level set ting condition 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT PSK memory transmission MYCALL 2 MYGALL3 OSLURS99 DE URS99 PT2 DE Icom icom K JDE icom icom l om K OSL UA 599 599 BK J SL DE icom icom UA 598 599 BK PT3 PT4 TI GSLUAS99 DE URS99
62. buried in noise The DSP performs the random noise reduction function 1 Push to turn the noise reduction ON e NR indicator above this switch lights green 2 Rotate the NR control to adjust the noise reduction level 3 Push to turn the noise reduction OFF NR indicator lights off 7 Large rotations of the NR control results in audio signal masking or distortion Set the NR control for maximum readability Ov The dial lock function prevents frequency changes by accidental movement of the tuning dial The lock func tion electronically locks the dial Push LOCK to toggle the dial lock function ON and OFF e The LOCK indicator lights when the dial lock function is In use 5 FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE E Notch function NOTCH control EI com O EEA 390 Of GI oO S MOR ao Oc Auto notch indication USB FIL2 14 100 00 1 SS VFO A ANT 1 Manual notch indication USB FIL2 14 100 00 VFO A ANT 1 E Digital selector DIGI SEL control com OG GAS SDS 00
63. can also be used 4 Push EXIT SET to exit memory list screen E com B a e 6 OF 20 ce Ce 000 000 OG e Memory list screen AGC MID SCAN EDGE MF 2 FIL SCAN EDGE WIDE Lt VIC OFF ROLL SET SELECT Confirming programmed memory channels S 1 Select memory list screen as described above 2 e 2 While pushing F 1 ROLL rotate the main dial to scroll the screen 3 Push F 2 SET to select the highlighted memory channel if desired e gt appears beside the selected memory channel num ber in the memory list screen and the selected memory channel contents are displayed below the frequency readout 4 Push EXIT SET to exit memory list screen O O 8 5 MEMORY OPERATION E Memory names Editing programming memory names O mn a 0 o 54
64. e During data mode selection push and hold for 1 sec to select data mode 1 D1 2 D2 and 3 D3 in sequence 5 Rotate the main dial to tune to the desired signal and decode it correctly e Also use the tuning indicator of the TNC or software e During SSB data mode 1 4 tuning function can be used for critical tuning 6 Operate the PC software or TNC to transmit e When operating in SSB data mode adjust the TNC out put level so that the ALC meter reading doesn t go out side the ALC zone TG NOTE When SSB data mode is selected the audio G input from the ACC1 pin 6 is used for transmis ZY sion instead of MIC s h The fixed condition is used for SSB data transmis h sion as follows e COMP OFF h Tx bandwidth MID G Tx Tone Bass 0 7 Tx Tone Trebles 0 v For your information Carrier frequency is displayed when SSB data mode is selected See the diagram left for the tone pair example FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE Section 5 W Spectrum scope SCreen ee 5 2 DO Center MOJE jr 5 2 PING MOOG sorer rrara EEE EERI 5 3 Mini scope screen indication uanruunnunnennvnnnnennvennnennvennvnnner 5 4 Scope ANN 5 4 Br ET atecnt races ae EE EEEE 5 9 E Attenuator eee rapecene sce mete ent eockene sams ienne serene ahany ole aewecases 5 9 BET TN ceases veri cinsecitartcs nooo bems ceeds feeedace eet iai 5 10 O RIT monitor TND gecmeacecenecessen ca wncisete snenie a aiaa 5 10 E AGCO UNGON EE EE NE 5 1
65. menu automatically RO For your convenience Two data formats Text and HTML are available for PC data storage E Operating AM MIC TX indicator RX indicator Band keys TI EI com o eu 29 O Oe 99C DE Taste 3 AF Main dial Appears AM FIL2 14 100 00 1 Convenient functions for receive e Preamp p 5 9 Push P AMP MF3 several times to set the pre amp OFF preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON e P AMP1 or P AMP2 appears when the preamp 1 or preamp 2 is ON e Attenuator p 5 9 Push ATT MF4 several times to set the attenu ator in 6 dB steps e Push and hold ATT MF3 for 1 sec to turn the atten uator function OFF e ATT and attenuation level appear when the attenu ator is ON e Noise blanker p 5 16 Push to turn the noise blanker ON and OFF and then rotate NB control to adjust the threshold level e Noise blanker indicator above switch lights when the noise blanker is ON e Push and hold NB for 1 sec to enter noise blanker set mode e Noise reduction p 5 17 Push to turn the noise reduction ON and OFF e Rotate NR control to adjust the noise reduction leve
66. the folder e Push and hold F 6 MAKE for 1 sec to making a new folder Edit the name with the same manner as the File name above Push F 1 DIR FILE twice to select the file name 3 Push F 6 SAVE e After the saving is completed return to voice recorder RX memory screen automatically The TX memory contents can also be saved into the USB Memory However the contents are saved with the message list set mode conditions etc at the same time See page 12 22 for details MEMORY OPERATION Section 8 E Memory channels EE EE EE RE 8 2 M Memory channel selection c cece ccc e ccc eeeceeeeeeeseeeeseeeseneeas 8 2 Using the a VW Keys oo ccc cc cece cece ee ee se eeeeeeeaeaeas 8 2 S Usmo the KeyPad rene 8 2 E Memory channel programming a rnnnennvnnnvvnnennnennnnennenenennnenee 8 3 Programming in VFO NOG Sos cn cee to nutee cess cee awaummewnnencusncicnaeisns 8 3 Programming in memory mode uannunnnnnennnnnnennennnnnnennennnsnee 8 3 E Frequency transferring sassnemanenmaseretedbbungntdenievadesvdseee 8 4 Transferring in VFO mode uden dde innta denmane 8 4 Transferring in memory mode rrnranvennennvnnnennennnnnvennennnsnee 8 4 E Memory list screen arannnannnannnnnnnernnnnnnernennnnnrnennnennnennnennnennn 8 5 Selecting a memory channel using the memory list screen 8 5 Confirming programmed memory channels rrrrnnnernennnnnenn 8 5 ME Memory names
67. 1 2 3 or not Repeat steps to to program another memory channel as a select memory channel Push to exit the memory list screen 1 Push several times to close a multi func tion screen if necessary 2 Push F 4 MEMORY to select memory list screen or push F 5 SCAN to select scan screen 3 Push and hold F 3eSELECT for 1 sec to display memory select all clear window 4 Push one of the following keys to clear all select scan setting F 1 x 1 Clears all x1 setting F 2 2 Clears all 2 setting F 3 3 Clears all 3 setting F 4 1 2 3 Clears all select setting 6 Push to exit the memory list screen Q SCANS E Tone scan COM Sais 2600 oO m O O l Ld ZJ EI 6s ees VFO A FM FIL1 50 100 000 1 1 14 195 00 USB TONE FREQUENCY REPEATER TONE T SQL TONE 88 5Hz 7 146 2Hz YD VA T SCAN 9 8 The transceiver can detect subaudible tones in a re ceived signal By monitoring a signal that is being transmitted on a repeater input frequency you can de termine the tone frequency required to access the re peater 1 Set the desired frequency or memory channel to be checked for a tone frequency 2 Push sever
68. 1 4 1 o O o O e PSK31 decoder screen PSK mode p 4 21 1 14 195 00 USB AGC PSK DECODE BPSK BFO 14 008 500 max PSK Encode Decode Monitor oc a 1500 MID PSKS1 BPSK OPSK nd Keyboard TX or Memory TX supper ted 1 4 Max 78 Characters x Beh TX Memory built in Data Saving to US8 Memery suppor led OFF wenn nanan nnn anne nnn nn nnn nnn een nnnn nn nn E50 2160 1 MYCALLx2 3 0SLURSG9 2 MYCALL 33 4 DEHIRS99 var THRESHOLD OFF MENU B OPSK SAVE SET WIDE F3 VOICE MEMORY SCAN e Memory list screen p 8 5 SPECTRUM SCOPE CENTER Grid Sk10dB 25K 0 500 000 L58 2 SCAN EDGE 29 990 999 USB 2 SCAN EDGE OFF WIDE WIDE vse vse etl 15 19 5 i 5 i Li HIS 20 OFF SPAN ATT MARKER HOLD CENT FIX SET ROLL SET SELECT NAME Cc WIDE e Voice recorder screen p 7 3 e Scan screen VFO mode p 9 4 VOICE RECORDER SCAN AF Center MHz AF Span 10 kHz Pi 0500 00 MHz VSC P 29 933 353 MHz Recall OFF TX MEMORY ne anno MHz WIDE Ti T2 TX LEV 4F SPAN RECALL MEMORY KEYER CQ TEST CQ TEST DE ICOM ICOM TEST UR SNN 100 ax AF Center MHz AF Span 10 kHz CFM TU WIDE var Recall GRE OFF MEMORY Sclect No ki TT MEMO AF SELEGT AF SPAN SEL No RECALL ATTY DECODE SET MODE Aue max ATTY EncodesDecode Monitor merx leaf AGL SET MODE MENU MID 45bps BAUDOT WMark 2125Hz Shift 17 Hz MID Keyboard TX r Memory TN supper ted 3 LEVEL T
69. 14 100 00 Appears 5 19 FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT Section 6 ES Mn erre 6 2 S Using the VOXAUNCUOM ascesectesceesesdecanstioueenassseccadconseeceeanies 6 2 gt Adjusting the VOX function ssccscveesuvesdsinsesncencencedeecesaseeneaeeeses 6 2 O VOX SEMO serseri re EAA ERASTA 6 2 E Break in function PENE 6 3 Semi break in Operation cece ec eseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 6 3 Q Full break in operation nn 6 3 E ATX GE go EE NE ninaa 6 4 Q ATX monitor 10 ge 0 PE EE 6 4 E Monitor function ve 6 4 E Transmit filter width setting SSB only cece cee cece ee eee eee 6 5 E Speech compressor SSB only cece eee ec cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 6 5 M Split frequency operation cece ecc eee eee cece eee eeeeeeeeaeeeeeenenaees 6 6 WE Quick split function EEE 6 7 O Split lock function smarner imesedaennenebekeerasdev dab nnne 6 7 6 1 6 FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT E VOX function The VOX Voice Operated Transmission function switches between transmit and receive with your voice This function provides hands free operation Using the VOX function TX 1 Select a phone mode SSB AM FM 2 Push to turn the VOX function ON or OFF a appears while the VOX is in use e VOX indicator above this switch lights green
70. 2 conductor 3 5 d mm 18 8 Q 16 7 to 150 Q unbalanced HF bands VSWR better than 3 1 20 to 125 Q unbalanced 50 MHz band VSWR better than 2 5 1 8 W HF bands 15 W 50 MHz band VSWR 1 5 1 or less Less than 1 0 dB The LCD display may have cosmetic imperfections that appear as small or dark spots This is not a malfunction or defect but a normal characteristic of LCD displays Spurious signals may be received near the following frequencies These are made in the internal circuit and does not indicate a transceiver malfunction e 0 150 MHz e 10 490 MHz Spurious waveforms may be displayed on the spectrum scope screen regardless of the transceiver s condition Tx or Rx They are made in the scope circuit This does not indicate a transceiver malfunction All stated specifications are typical and subject to change without notice or obligation 15 3 15 SPECIFICATIONS AND OPTIONS E Options e IC PW1 EURO HF 50 MHz ALL BAND 1 kW LINEAR AMPLIFIER Cr COM E PA e CT 17 ci v LEVEL CONVERTER e SP 20 EXTERNAL SPEAKER 15 4 Full duty cycle 1 kW linear amplifier including an auto matic antenna tuner Has automatic tuning and band selection capability when used with an Icom trans ceiver Full break in QSK operation The amplifier oower supply unit and the remote control unit are separate Unidirectional electret microphone for base station operation Includes UP DOWN switches and a low
71. 8 V DC is applied to ACC2 pin 6 16 000MHz 14 000 00 gt 30 000 00 Normal When reverse polarity is selected Mark and Space are reversed e Normal Key open close Mark Space e Reverse Key open close Space Mark English HM Others set mode continued SPEECH S Level The IC 7700 speech processor has frequency mode and signal level announcement Signal level an nouncement can be deactivated if desired default ON When OFF is selected the signal level is not an nounced SPEECH MODE Switch Selects the operating mode speech capability when a mode switch is pushed ON or OFF default OFF When ON is selected the selected operating mode is announced when a mode switch is pushed Memopad Numbers Sets the number of memo pad channels available 5 or 10 memo pads can be set default 5 MAIN DIAL Auto TS Sets the auto tuning step function for the main dial When rotating the main dial rapidly the tuning step automatically changes several times as selected There are 2 type of auto tuning steps HIGH Fastest and LOW Faster default HIGH MIC Up Down Speed Sets the rate at which frequencies are scanned when the microphone UP DN switches are pushed and held High or low can be selected Quick RIT ATX Clear Selects the RIT ATX frequency clearing instruction with the switch 12 15 12 SET MODE Auto tuning step is turned ON Fastest tun ing step du
72. COMP zone 10 to 20 dB range for your normal voice level 7 When the COMP meter peaks exceed the COMP 7 zone your transmitted voice may be distorted G Push METER MF2 5 times to select the ALC meter 6 While speaking into the microphone rotate DRIVE so that the ALC meter reads within the 30 to 50 range of the ALC zone with your normal voice level COMP zone D e v For your convenience Push and hold METER MF2 for 1 sec to display the multi function meter that can check the ALC and COMP level at a glance 6 5 6 FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT E Split frequency operation Split frequency operation allows you to transmit and receive in the same mode on two different frequencies Split frequency operation is performed using 2 fre quencies on the main and sub readouts The following is an example of setting 21 290 MHz for receiving and 21 310 MHz for transmitting NM Set 21 290 MHz USB in VFO mode 2 Push momentarily then push and hold SPLIT indicator fom _ ee A B for 1 sec I e The quick split function is much more convenient for se ET lecting the transmit frequency See the next section for details O O K U e The equalized transmit frequency and Jy appear on the LCD
73. CW DISPLAY SET LCD Unit Bright Backlight Switches Display Type Di eer WIDE Meter Response Meter Type Normal Sc vse Meter Type Wide Screen OFF Meter Peak Hold Bar Y 13 4 The SWR meter indicates the SWR over the transmis sion line in all modes 1 Push to turn the antenna tuner OFF 2 Push and hold METER for 1 sec to display multi function meter 3 Push once or twice to select RTTY mode 4 Push TRANSMIT 5 Rotate RF PWR clockwise past the 12 o clock po sition for more than 30 W output power 6 Read the SWR on the SWR meter gage T Push to close multi function meter 7 The built in antenna tuner matches the transmitter Y to the antenna when the SWR is lower than 3 1 2 types of screen images and 5 types of frequency readout indication fonts are available in the IC 7700 GO Push several times to close multi function screen if necessary 2 Push F 7 SET to select set mode menu screen 3 Push F 3 DISP to enter display set mode 4 Push F 1 A or F 2 V to select Display Type item when selecting the screen image select Dis play Font when selecting the frequency readout in dication font Rotate the main dial to select the desired screen image or font e Screen image is selectable from A Black back and B Blue back e Basic 1 Basic 2 Italic Round and Slim are available for the frequency readout font 6 Push twice to exit fro
74. EE N E E E A piaedaeienanen dons 5 9 E RIT OLIGO vere 5 10 RITT UNCION re 5 10 E AGO UNCION rece es EEE e Eni 5 11 Selecting the preset value rrarrnnnnaananannnanenannnnvenanennvennne 5 11 Adjusting the AGC time Constant cece cece eee eee cease eeeeeas 5 11 Setting the AGC time constant preset value ccceeee eee 5 11 E win PBT operation Ve 5 12 BIP ved 5 13 Q IF filter selection sincaxscncnees oes acasaceeusiamocmesvenceteamaresd anntenaes 5 13 Filter passband width setting except FM mode 5 13 GO Roofing filter selection siccucsectscnmsttncetensnetaaulentatadsearesiwatadnes 5 14 OSPR TINGE GRADS pvr 5 14 Filter shape Set mode ccccceec eee eee esse eeeeeeeeesaeeanenanes 5 14 BENN Seed 5 16 VEE 5 16 EN NNN oon cnahetactoscacedansetanatieneodeteusainesadaantemetecnetnee 5 17 WE Dial lock function EN trenanccs tee mcansecisesnteeer ee eensee 5 17 Hele 0 ae oa EE NS 5 18 E Digital seleclol Repos tute senate snap wade me EEN EAREN 5 18 E FOUN OUUMG TUNGO sccscusesnegeaeitaaminah nEn a EREA EN NEA R kE 5 19 Section 6 FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT ENN he 6 2 USING the VOX TUNCHON eee 6 2 Adjusting the VOX function cece cc ece cece cece ease eeeeeaeenaeeeas 6 2 GVD ape cenccesetesnceeeeetawsac EE ERAS 6 2 Bee Ge 6 3 Semi break in operation rarannannrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnenn 6 3 Q Full break in operation 544244 ed 6 3 E AA ee ER EE
75. FM mode 2 Push AGC MF5 several times to select AGC fast AGC medium MID or AGC slow e Push and hold for 1 sec to turn the AGC function OFF Adjusting the AGC time constant M Select any non FM mode Push AGC VR then rotate AGC control to adjust the AGC time constant e AGC VR indicator above the switch lights green Setting the AGC time constant preset value M Select any non FM mode Push and hold AGC MF5 for 1 sec to enter AGC set mode 3 Push AGC MF5 several times to select FAST time constant 4 Rotate the main dial to set the desired time constant for AGC FAST e AGC time constant can be set between 0 1 to 8 0 sec depends on mode or turned OFF e Push and hold F 4 DEF for 1 sec to select a default 2 0 MID 0 2 0 3 0 5 0 8 1 2 1 6 2 0 value Hr 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 5 Push AGC MF5 to select medium time constant 6 Rotate the main dial to set the desired time constant for AGC MID 0 5 MID e 0 2 0 3 0 5 0 8 1 2 1 6 2 0 eae 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 e AGC time constant can be set between 0 1 to 8 0 sec depends on mode or turned OFF e Push and hold F 4 DEF for 1 sec to select a default 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 5 0 8 1 2 1 6 2 0 value 25 30 40 50 60 7 Push AGC MF5 to select slow time constant Rotate the main dial to set the desired time constant for AGC SLOW 0 3 0 5 0 8 1 2 1 6 2 0 2 5 3 0 e AGC time constant can b
76. IF FILTER INDICATOR p 5 13 Shows the selected IF filter number QUICK TUNING INDICATOR p 3 6 Appears when the quick tuning step function is in use FREQUENCY READOUTS Shows the operating frequency MULTI FUNCTION SCREEN Shows the screens for the multi function digital meter spectrum scope voice recorder memory list scan memory keyer RT TY decoder PSK decoder IF filter selection or set modes etc LCD FUNCTION SWITCH GUIDE Indicates the function of the LCD function switches PN MEMORY CHANNEL READOUTS Shows the selected memory channel contents in VFO mode Shows the VFO contents in memory mode MULTI FUNCTION SWITCH GUIDE Indicates the function of the multi function switches SELECT MEMORY CHANNEL INDICATOR p 9 7 Indicates the displayed memory channel is set as a select memory channel SELECT ANTENNA INDICATOR Indicates the selected antenna 1 PANEL DESCRIPTION TX INDICATOR Indicates the frequency readout for transmit VFO MEMORY CHANNEL INDICATOR p 3 3 Indicates the VFO mode or selected memory chan nel number MODE INDICATOR Shows the selected mode I PANEL DESCRIPTION E Screen menu arrangement The following screens can be selected from the start Pushing several times returns to the start up up screen Choose the desired screen using the fol screen See p 12 3 for set mode arrangement lowing chart 16 41 57 UTC 18 41 USA ne MSE FiL2
77. IHOLD CLA AFC NET 4 TX MEM p WIDE P TX buffer screen QD J FFT scope ig RX contents screen Water fall i Vector tuning indicator e Vector tuning indicator indication example Tuned BPSK signal Tuned QPSK signal O BPSK QPSK idle signal Unmodulated signal V 4 21 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT A high quality DSP based PSK31 encoder decoder is built in to the IC 7700 When connecting a PC key board p 2 6 PSK31 operation can be performed without PSK software installed on your PC If desired you can also use your PSK software con sult the manual that comes with the software 1 Push a band key to select the desired band 2 Push to select PSK After PSK mode is selected push and hold for 1 sec to toggle between PSK and PSK R modes e PSK or PSK R appears 3 Push F 3eDECODE to display the decode screen e The IC 7700 has a built in PSK31 decoder 4 Tune to the desired signal with the main dial e The signal is properly tuned when the radiated lines in the vector tuning indicator narrow as show in the exam ple below e The radiated lines in the vector tuning indicator may be displayed sporadically e When a PSK signal is received the water fall display is activated e The water fall display shows the signal condition within the passband and a vertical line appears when a PSK signal is received 5 Press F12 of the connected keyboard to transmit
78. IMPORTANT 7 Push to stop recording before or when 7 30 sec has passed from the start of recording 7 The voice recorder memory records the 30 sec max of audio before is pushed For example when recording 40 sec of audio the first 10 sec audio will be over written with the last 10 sec so that the total of audio recorded is 4 only 30 sec 7 When you record the 21st audio message or Y when the total audio length exceeds 209 sec the 7 oldest recorded audio is automatically erased to 7 make room for the new audio 6 Push twice to exit the voice recorder screen 7 NOTE When transmit or PTT is pushed while U recording no audio will be recorded NN 0nNWWN To record the received signal immediately one touch voice recording is available Push momentarily to record the previous 15 sec audio e The recordable time period can be set in voice set mode p 7 9 7 VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS E Playing the recorded audio Basic playin Of o Use FIL2 14 100 00 1 10 120 00 CW VOICE RECORDER PROTECT CLA Counts down 506
79. IN selection Y the IC 7700 will not work properly Select OFF or Y OUT then reboot the IC 7700 in such case or 50 Y NOTE Default setting is different for each trans ceiver A See p 13 4 for details Basic 1 See p 13 4 for details 12 SET MODE E Display set mode continued Meter Response Set meter needle response from SLOW MID and FAST default MID Meter Type Normal Screen Selects the desired S RF meter type during normal screen indication from Standard Edgewise and Bar default Standard Meter Type Wide Screen Selects the desired S RF meter type during wide screen or mini scope indication from Edgewise and Bar default Bar Meter Peak Hold Bar Turns the meter peak hold function ON and OFF default ON This function is used for the bar meter only Memory Name Sets the memory name indication during memory mode operation ON and OFF default ON APF Width Popup APF OFF ON Selects the pop up display for the APF filter width from ON and OFF default ON MN Q Popup MN OFF ON Enables the pop up indication capability when the notch filter width is changed from ON to OFF default ON MID This setting is effective for the standard and edge wise meter type selections only Standard ON e ON The programmed memory name is displayed above the frequency indication e OFF No memory name is displayed even a mem ory name is progra
80. MIC The AFSK modulation signal can also be input to MIC Rear panel 1 Antenna 1 2 3 4 p 2 8 Connects a linear amplifier antenna selector etc X VERTER Connects a transverter for V UHF band use REMOTE RS 232C p 14 2 Used for computer control and transceive operation The optional CT 17 is required when connecting a PC to REMOTE fcom HF 50MHz TRANSCEIVER IC 7700 MIC O RF PWR e e ER Yom LY ME N RANTA g 4 8 q d phy Y Q OLO T O Oo0Q TRANSMIT MONITOR KEY SPEED DELAY e e se J cw Jerv DRIVE COMP MONI GAIN VOX GAI X VERTER D RX ANT IN OUT Connects an external preamp or lowpass filter RX ANT IN OUT must be activated in the antenna set screen p 10 5 DE our EXT r ACC MAX1A METER KEYPAD External speaker p 15 4 SP 20 option EXT SP 2 1 990 9 9 0500 EXT DISPLAY RS 232C AC l T I000000000001 o INNI o ALC RELAY ALC ADJ OUT IN REMOTE S P DIF p I CW KEY 10dBm RELAY ALC p 2 8 Used for connecting a non Icom linear amplifier ACC sockets pgs 2 9 2 11 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS 2 Rear panel 2 External Display Ethernet connector p 16 6 Connects a PC style 1 Connects a PC monitor display at least
81. Mid Long and OFF settings are available 77 be echoed 6 2 E Break in function Semi break in operation DELAY outer control VFO A OCW FIL2 14 100 00 TE Full break in operation BW 500 SFT VFO A CW FIL2 14 100 00 1 ri neii wheo 6 3 FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT 6 The break in function is used in CW mode to automat ically toggle the transceiver between transmit and re ceive when keying The IC 7700 is capable of full break in or semi break in During semi break in operation the transceiver selects transmit when keying then automatically returns to re ceive after a pre set time after you stop sending 1 Push to select CW or CW R mode 2 Push once or twice to turn the semi break in function ON ZN appears 3 Rotate DELAY to set the break in delay time the delay from transmit to receive 7 When using a paddle rotate KEY SPEED to adjust A the keying speed During full break in operation the transceiver auto matically enters transmit while keying and returns to receive immediately after keying is finished Push to select CW or CW R mode 2 Push once or twice to turn the full break in function ON BEN appears
82. NOT change VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS Section 7 W About digital voice recorder 2 cccivccnecensdaovetunneateaxcsevecesasisweaatend es 7 2 M Recording a received audio cc cece cece eeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeseneeas 7 3 VET ON heard 7 3 One touch recording mes ere senee 7 3 Mi Playing the recorded audio arrnanannnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnr 7 4 Basic playing EE Eiei 7 4 One touch playing Lennpesteniaeeserske aecnvicsdisceasthieeaceeawens 7 4 Mi Protect the recorded contents ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeenees 7 5 WE Erasing the recorded Content ccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeegeeeenens 7 5 M Recording a message for transmit cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeees 7 6 Q Recording vasetebe re sncateanauicetenenesgsdanieadeveeedeniey stadentidceranaans 7 6 Confirming a message for transmit cceccee cesses eeeeeeeees 7 6 M Programming a memory NAME zn kee e cece eee e cnet sete eeeeeeeneeeeneees 7 7 E Sending a recorded message arrarrnnnnnnannennnannennenunennenesanene 7 8 Transmit level setting oo ccc ee eee cece e sees esse eeeeeeeneeeaeeeeanes 7 8 Mi Voice set mode rarrnnnannnnnnnannvannnennnannnennnnnnnesnnsnnesnnnnnnennnnnne 7 9 WE Saving a voice message into the USB Memory 0508 7 10 Saving the received audio Memory cc ccc ece eae eeeeeeeeaeeas 7 10 Saving the TX memory ccc ccc eee ce cece ee eeee eee eeenaeeaeeeen
83. Push ABC MF6 123 MF7 or Symbol MF7 to select the character group then ro tate the main dial to select the character e ABC MF6 A to Z capital letters 123 ME 0 to 9 numerals Symbol MF7 4 amp _ can be selected e Push F 1 lt 0 to move the cursor left push F 2 P to move the cursor right F 3 DEL delete a char acter and push F 4 SPACE to insert a space Push to set the file name e File format 1 Push F 5 OPTION to enter save option screen 2 Rotate the main dial to select the saving for mat from Text and HTML e Text is the default setting e Push and hold F 4 DEF for 1 sec to select the default setting Push to return to the previous indi cation e Saving location 1 Push F 1 DIR FILE to select tree view screen 2 Select the desired directory or folder in the USB Memory e Push F 4 gt to select the upper directory e Push F 2 A or F 3 VW to select folder in the same directory e Push and hold F 4 lt 4 gt for 1 sec to select a folder in the directory e Push F 5 REN DEL to rename the folder e Push and hold F 5 REN DEL for 1 sec to delete the folder e Push and hold F 6 MAKE for 1 sec to make a new folder Edit the name with the same manner as the File name above Push F 1 DIR FILE twice to select the file name 4 Push F 6 SAVE e After saving is completed return to PSK decode second
84. Push F 1 4 or F 2 P for cursor movement e Push F 3 DEL to delete the selected character e Push F 4 SPACE to input a space e Pushing the transceiver s keypad 0 9 can also enter numerals 6 Push to input and set the name e The cursor disappears 7 Repeat steps to to program another memory channel s name if desired 8 Push EXIT SET to exit memory list screen Any unused memory channels can be cleared The cleared memory channels become blank channels 1 Select memory mode with V M 2 Push F 4 MEMORY to select memory list screen 3 Select the desired memory channel with a 4 Push and hold F 5 CLR for 1 sec to clear the con tents e The programmed frequency and operating mode disap pear 5 To clear other memory channels repeat steps and E Memo pads Of 000 Ol BI BI O O 0 0000 000 00 O Og MEMORY OPERATION 8 The transceiver has a memo pad function to store fre quency and operating mode for easy write and recall The memo pads are separate from memory channels The default number of memo pads is 5 however this can be increased to 10 in set mode if desir
85. RTTY Decode New Line Code Selects the new line code of the internal RTTY de coder CR Carriage Return LF Line Feed RTTY Diddle Selects the diddle condition This set mode is used to set the decode USOS func tion time stamp setting etc e Setting contents 1 During RTTY mode operation push F 3 DECODE to select RTTY decode screen 2 Push F 1 lt MENU15 to select the second RTTY decode menu then push F 6 SET to select RT TY decode set mode e Push F 7 WIDE to toggle the screen size from normal and wide 3 Push F 1 A or F 2 V to select the desired set item 4 Set the desired condition using the main dial e Push and hold F 4 DEF for 1 sec to select a default condition or value e Push F 3 lt 4 gt to select the set contents for some items 5 Push to exit from set mode OFF Recommendation If you use the FFT scope waveform for tuning use the default or smaller number setting is recommended Mam 153 me 255 e Push F 3 gt to select R Red G Green and B Blue and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255 ON e ON _ Decode as letter code e OFF Decode as character code CR LF CR LF e CR LF CR LF Makes new line with any codes e CR LF Makes new line with CR LF code only Transmits blank code during no code transmission Transmits letter code during no code transmission Turns the diddle function OFF RTTY decode set
86. RX ANT4 RX should be selected for ANT4 14 10 SPECIFICATIONS AND OPTIONS Section 15 eee 10 OE EEE EE 15 2 S General eects pete nE E sentria oetiaea seen eeoseenuneseneeuse 15 2 Transmitter gadeecdeasewetaeecsenscsssepeeanneouedstacensarsecuseescmcotenes 15 2 Receiver pac Geeecce eaten cease ceage sense veweasauesescoeeneneveuerssaterige es 15 3 Antenna tuner sicecscideveveswescdedencscevedsvadeuentectvevaunewestseteunse 15 3 BE sirener ene a O eee eee 15 4 15 SPECIFICATIONS AND OPTIONS E Specifications General e Frequency coverage unit MHz Receiver Transmitter e Operating mode e Number of memory channels e Antenna connector e Operating temperature range e Frequency stability e Frequency resolution e Power supply requirement e Power consumption Receive Stand by Max audio Transmit at 200 W e Dimensions projections not included e Weight e ACC 1 connectors e ACC 2 connectors e Display e EXT DISPLAY connector e Cl V connector e RS 232C connector e USB connector Transmitter Transmit output power SSB CW RTTY PSK31 FM AM e Modulation system SSB AM FM e Spurious emission e Carrier suppression e Unwanted side band suppression e ATX variable range e Microphone connector e ELEC KEY connector e KEY connector e RELAY connector e ALC connector Downloaded by RadioAmateur EU 0 030000 60 000000 1 800000 1 999999 3 500000 3 999999 5 000500
87. SHARP 7 The set filter shape is automatically used only 7 When the IF filter is set to 500 Hz or narrower SHARP 7 The set filter shape is automatically used only 7 when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider SOFT 7 The set filter shape is automatically used only 7 when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider SHARP 7 The set filter shape is automatically used only when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider SHARP 7 The set filter shape is automatically used only 7 when the IF filter is set to 500 Hz or narrower SHARP 7 The set filter shape is automatically used only 7 when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider 5 FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE E Noise blanker The noise blanker eliminates pulse type noise such as the noise from car ignitions The noise blanker is not available for FM mode MPush NB to turn the noise blanker function ON E ton and OFF C EET 50 OF e NB indicator above this switch lights green 2 Rotate NB control to adjust the noise blanker threshold level O Q A B i 7 When using the noise blanker received signals may 7 be distorted if they are excessively strong or the noise type is other than impulse Turn the noise blanker OFF or rotate NB control to a shallow po 7 sition in this case
88. USB Click Memory copy the extracted firmware e g Fil n ret 7700 110 dat Gear Docu Lens 7700 110 dat to the USB Memory IC 7700 folder e The USB Memory must have been formatted by the IC 7700 p 12 26 16 3 16 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE E Firmware update USB Memory S com C Saar oO Of Oc 30 50 30 C 3 GE 2 eee H os OG Ce RELE nai USB MEMORY MENU LOAD Load memory and se dt for setup SAVE Save your memory and settings FIRM UP Update the firmware of CPUs and DSPs FORMAT Format the USB Memory in FATIFATS2 for IC 7700 UNMOGUNT Unmount the USB Memnory to remove safely FIAM UP FORMAT UNMOUNT FIRMWARE UPDATE o Gwt s nd responsibility ji Ta Fut tion manui CANCEL CANCEL WIDE Sse OFF 491 0MB DIR FILE FIRM UP CANCEL a gr ar a a re FILE LOADING sce Please wait 16 4 When updating the firmware with the USB Memory no IP address or subnet mask settings are necessary M Copy the downloaded firmware data into the USB Memory IC 7700 folder e The USB Memory must have been formatted by the IC 7 00 2 Insert the USB Memory into the USB connector 3 Push several times to close a multi func t
89. and ACC1 pin 4 Use the signals from S P DIF e MIC ACC e S P DIF MIC ACC e MIC e ACC e MIC ACC Use the signals from MIC Use the signals from ACC1 pin 4 Use the signals from MIC and ACC1 pin 4 default e S P DIF Use the signals from S P DIF 12 SET MODE HM ACC set mode continued DATA3 MOD MIC Selects the desired connector s for modulation input e MIC Use the signals from MIC default when data 3 mode D3 is in use e ACC Use the signals from ACC1 pin 4 e MIC ACC Use the signals from MIC and ACC1 pin 4 e S P DIF Use the signals from S P DIF SEND Relay Type Lead Selects the switching relay type for RELAY from e Lead Use mechanical relay Lead and MOSFET 16 V DC 0 5 A max default Select the suitable relay type when connecting a non e MOS FET Use semiconductor type relay Icom linear amplifier 250 V 200 mA max External Meter Output Selects the desired item for an external meter indica Outputs the receiving signal strength level tion during receive and outputs the selected level selected with METER during transmit default Outputs the receiving signal strength level during receive Outputs the transmitting power level dur ing transmit Outputs the VSWR level during transmit Outputs the ALC level during transmit Outputs the compression level during transmit Outputs the drain terminal voltage of the f
90. boosting the mark and space frequencies 2125 and 2295 Hz for better reception of RTTY signals During RTTY mode push to turn the twin peak filter ON and OFF e appears in the LCD and the APF TPF indicator above this switch lights green while the filter is in use 7 NOTE When the twin peak filter is in use the re G ceived audio output may increase This is a normal Y not a malfunction Functions for the RTTY decoder indication I com 2 SE caec 20 O oe amp Cee 000 9 METER Po P AMP 1 ATT OFF AGC MID 1 4 OFF vsc OFF MENU 1 gt METER Po P AMP 1 ATT OFF AGC MID 1 4 OFF vsc OFF MENU 1 gt poor ATTY Encode Decode Moni tor on ATTY EncodesDecode Monitor ER SHE Snn FiL2 14 100 000 VFO A ANT 1 RTTY DECODE RTTY Encode Decode Monitor ok aios BAUDOT lark 2125Hz Keyboard TX or Memory TX suppor Max 7 Characters x Bch TX and ry pul lt in Data Saving to US8 Memory suppor te 2860 THRESHOLD 1 MYCALL x2 2 MYCALL 3 8 3 QSLURS99 4 DE URS99 HOLD CLR WIDE Wide screen indication 8 1 3 5 7 9 BW 5
91. channel In this case transferring is not possible 3 Push and hold for 1 sec to transfer the fre quency and operating mode e Transferred frequency and operating mode appear on the frequency readout This is useful for transferring frequency and operating mode while operating in memory mode e Displayed frequency mode and filter setting are transferred e Programmed frequency and mode in the memory channel are not transferred and they remain in the memory channel SSN 1 Select the memory channel to be transferred with a v in memory mode e And set the frequency or operating mode if required 2 Push and hold for 1 sec to transfer the fre quency and operating mode e Displayed frequency and operating mode are transferred to the VFO 3 To return to VFO mode push momentarily MEMORY OPERATION 8 E Memory list screen The memory list screen simultaneously shows 9 mem ory channels and their programmed contents 15 mem ory channels can be displayed in the wide memory list screen You can select a desired memory channel from the memory list screen Selecting a memory channel using the memory list screen v OM Push several times to close a multi func tion screen if necessary 2 Push F 4 MEMORY to select memory list screen e F 7 WIDE switches the standard and wide screens 3 While pushing and holding F 1 ROLL rotate the main dial to select the desired memory channel e A and vw
92. channel 12 SG FIL2 14 100 00 1 10 120 000 CW VFO A LSB FIL2 7 088 000 1 10 120 00 CW VFO A LSB 7 088 00 7 088 00 LSB Programming in memory mode EXAMPLE Programming 21 280 MHz USB into memory channel 18 12ch LSB FIL2 7 088 00 VFO A 14 100 00 USB C or CI then EI 18ch USB FIL2 21 280 00 VFO A 14 700 00 USB j Beep Beep Push for 1 sec Beep 18ch USB FIL2 2 21 280 00 VFO A 14100 00 USB 8 3 MEMORY OPERATION 8 Memory channel programming can be preformed ei ther in VFO mode or in memory mode 1 Set the desired frequency operating mode and fil ter width in VFO mode 2 Push a v several times to select the de sired memory channel e Memory list screen is convenient for selecting the de sired channel e Memory channel contents appear in the memory chan nel readout below the frequency readout e _ appears if the selected memory channel is a blank channel and does not have contents 3 Push and hold for 1 sec to program the displayed frequency operating mode etc into the memory channel Select the desired memory channel with a VW Jin memory mode e Memory channel contents appear in the memory chan nel readout below the frequency readout e _ appears if the selected memory channel is a blank channel and does not have contents 2 Set the desired frequency and operating mode in mem
93. com pressor function is ON and OFF e The following filters are specified as the default Each of the filter width can be re set in level set mode p 12 6 WIDE 100 Hz to 2 9 kHz MID 300 Hz to 2 7 kHz NAR 500 Hz to 2 5 kHz EI ftom DES EG O amp JE O 555555 10000 000 00 OOOO E Speech compressor SSB only The speech compressor increases average RF output power improving signal strength and readability in SSB mode only MIC METER COMP 1 Select USB or LSB mode and adjust MIC to a suit able level i gt e Push METER MF2 several times to select the ALC meter for microphone gain adjustment 2 Push COMP MF6 to turn the speech compressor S gt ON o0 Gog 3 Push METER MF2 once to select the COMP meter den 2 While speaking into the microphone rotate COMP DRIVE COMP control control so that the COMP meter reads within the
94. cut function For remote transceiver control using a PC You can change frequencies operating mode memory chan nels etc software is not included 4 audio filters headphone jack can connect to 2 transceivers e Input impedance 8Q e Max input power 5W Hand microphone equipped with UP DOWN switch es UPDATING THE FIRMWARE Section 16 KE EE ENI A E AEE 16 2 Ke EEE EE NE ss 16 2 As 0 EE MN ME NE NE 16 3 V Firmware NAMMUN asuscxesaiaerormueanntecanunennereouddmnecnebatia 16 3 File downloading r e 16 3 E Firmware update USB Memory raneunnannennvnnnanvennnnnvennennnsne 16 4 E Firmware update 0 EE matesedavtanereaesecaas 16 6 Connections veke 16 6 O IP address setting 2 enke 16 7 Updating from the PO se 16 8 16 1 16 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE E General At least one available USB 2 0 or 1 1 port is required to copy the downloaded firmware file An Ethernet card board 10 BASE T 100 BASE TX compatible is required when updating the firmware from the PC The USB hub and Ethernet card board are not sup plied by Icom Ask your PC dealer about a USB hub and an Ethernet card board for details E Caution 16 2 The IC 7700 s firmware can be updated if desired By updating the firmware new function s can be added and the improvement of performance parameters can be made 2 methods of firmware update are available one uses the USB Memory and the other uses a PC You can choose ei
95. dial lock function while pushing XFC during split frequency operation The dial lock s effect during split frequency operation can be selected in the set mode for both receive and transmit frequencies or only the receive frequency p 12 13 6 6 M Quick split function SPLIT indicator EI com CO Dac A DD ad XFC ANT r F 14 06 19 1 LANTA UTC 14 08 METER Po VFO A USB FIL2 21 290 00 P AMP 1 ATT OFF Split lock function LOCK indicator COM O OOS 200 06 O a es o o 000 999 6 7 FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT 6 When you find a DX station an important considera tion is how to set the split frequency When you push and hold the switch for 1 sec split frequency operation is turned ON and the trans mit frequency is equalized to the received frequency This shortens the time needed to begin split frequency operation The quick
96. eaeeeaeeeeeees 13 7 M About protection indications ccccc cece cece neces eeae sees eeeeeaas 13 8 M Screen Saver Function 2 c ccc ecceceec cece ee eee ee eeeeeeeaeeteeeeaeeaes 13 8 13 1 13 MAINTENANCE E Troubleshooting The following chart is designed to help you correct problems which are not equipment malfunctions If you are unable to locate the cause of a problem or solve it through the use of this chart contact you near est Icom Dealer or Service Center Transceiver power PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF Power does not come on Power cable is improperly connected e Re connect the AC power cable correctly when the POWER switch The internal power supply is turned OFF e Turn the internal power supply ON e Circuit breaker is tripped e Check for the cause then re set the circuit breaker Transmit and receive PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF sounds from the Volume level is too low e Rotate AF clockwise to obtain a suitable lis p 3 9 aie tening level e The squelch is closed e Turn SQL to 10 o clock position to open the p 3 9 squelch e The transceiver is in transmit e Push TRANSMIT to receive or check the SEND line of an external unit if connected Sensitivity is too low and The antenna is not connected properly Re connect to the antenna connector only strong signals are The antenna for another band is selected e Select an antenna suita
97. frequency set to the repeater s receive frequency 7 For accessing a repeater which requires a repeater 7 tone set the repeater tone frequency in tone fre 7 quency set mode as described below 1 Set the offset frequencies HF 50 MHz and turn ON the quick split function in Others set mode in ad vance pgs 12 12 12 13 2 Push to select VFO mode 3 Push the desired band key 4 Push several times to select FM mode 5 Set the receive frequency repeater output fre quency 6 Push and hold for 1 sec to start repeater operation e Repeater tone is turned ON automatically e SPLIT indicator lights and KJ appears on the LCD e Shifted transmit frequency and TX appear in the sub band e The transmit frequency can be monitored while pushing XFC 7 Push and hold PTT to transmit release PTT to receive To return to simplex push momentarily RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4 Repeater tone frequency setting Some repeaters require subaudible tones to be ac cessed Subaudible tones are superimposed on your normal signal and must be set in advance The trans ceiver has 50 tones from 67 0 Hz to 254 1 Hz M Select FM mode 2 Push and hold TONE for 1 sec to tone frequency set mode Gem 3 Push F 1 A or F 2 V to select REPEATER Sa AL TONE item S 4 Rotate the main dial to select the desired repeater
98. gt USB D1 gt USB D2 LSB LSB D1 LSB D2 AM AM D1 AM D2 FM FM D1 FM D2 USB D3 LSB D3 AM D3 FM D3 Push mode switch for 1 sec Push mode switch momentarily 3 8 SSB USB LSB SSB data USB data LSB data CW CW reverse CW R RTTY RTTY reverse RI TY R PSK PSK reverse PSK R AM AM data FM and FM data modes are available in the IC 7700 Select the desired operation mode as follows To select a mode of operation push the desired mode switch momentarily Push the switch again to toggle between USB and LSB CW and CW R RTTY RTTY R and PSK PSK R AM and FM if desired Push and hold the switch for 1 sec to toggle between RT TY and RTTY R PSK and PSK R if desired See the diagram below left for the order of selection 7 Microphone signals are muted when data mode is 77 selected e Selecting SSB mode gt Push to select USB or LSB e USB is selected first when above 10 MHz or LSB is se lected first when below 10 MHz operation USB is selected when 5 MHz band is selected for the USA version e After USB or LSB is selected push to toggle between USB and LSB e Selecting CW mode Push to select CW e After CW is selected push to toggle between CW and CW reverse mode e Selecting RTTY PSK mode Push to select RTTY or PSK After RTTY or PSK is selected push to toggle between RTTY and PSK e After RTTY or PSK is selected push and hold for 1 sec to toggle between
99. match your transmit frequency ex actly to another station s by matching the audio tone You can also use the CW side tone be sure to turn OFF break in to practice CW sending CW side tone level can be adjusted in level set mode p 12 6 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT APF Audio Peak Filter operation E com Eee 200 aE gt SST SD Sea DIGI SEL 4 6 The APF changes the audio frequency response by boosting a particular frequency to enhance a desired CW signal The peak frequency can be adjusted with DIGI SEL control when APF is selected for DIGI SEL VR Op eration in Others set mode p 12 16 The audio filter shape is also selectable from SOFT and SHARP in Others set mode p 12 16 1 During CW mode push to turn the audio peak filter ON and OFF FER appears in the display and APF TPF indicator above this switch lights green 2 Push and hold for 1 sec several times to select the desired audio filter width e WIDE MID and NAR filters or 320 160 and 80 Hz fil ters are available depending on APF type setting in level set mode 3 If APF is selected for DIGI SEL VR Operation rotate DIG
100. may result in an electrical shock or burn A WARNING NEVER operate the transceiver with a headset or other audio accessories at high vol ume levels Hearing experts advise against continuous high volume operation If you experience a ringing in your ears reduce the volume or discontinue use A CAUTION NEVER change the internal set tings of the transceiver This may reduce transceiver performance and or damage to the transceiver In particular incorrect settings for transmitter circuits such as output power idling current etc might dam age the expensive final devices The transceiver warranty does not cover any problems caused by unauthorized internal adjustment A CAUTION NEVER touch the transceiver top cover when transmitting continuously for long periods The top cover may be hot A CAUTION NEVER let metal wire or other ob jects protrude into the transceiver or into connectors on the rear panel This may result in an electric shock A CAUTION NEVER block any cooling vents on the top rear or bottom of the transceiver A CAUTION NEVER expose the transceiver to rain snow or any liquids A CAUTION NEVER install the transceiver in a place without adequate ventilation Heat dissipation may be reduced and the transceiver may be dam aged A CAUTION NEVER operate or touch the trans ceiver with wet hands This may result in an electric shock or damage to the transceiver A CAUTION The transceiver wei
101. mode continued RTTY TX USOS Explicitly inserts the FIGS character even though it is not required by the receiving station RTTY Time Stamp Turn the time stamp date transmission or reception time indication ON and OFF RTTY Auto CR LF by TX Selects the automatic new line code CR LF trans mission capability RTTY Time Stamp Time Selects the clock indication for time stamp usage NOTE The time won t be displayed when OFF is selected in RT TY Time Stamp as above RTTY Time Stamp Frequency Selects the operating frequency indication for time stamp usage NOTE The frequency won t be displayed when OFF is selected in RTTY Time Stamp as above RTTY Font Color Receive Set the text color for received characters e The color is set in RGB format e The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale RTTY Font Color Transmit Set the text color for transmitted characters e The color is set in RGB format e The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale RTTY Font Color Time Stamp Set the text color for time stamp indication e The color is set in RGB format e The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale RTTY Font Color TX Buffer Set the text color in the TX buffer screen e The color is set in RGB format e The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4 Inserts FIGS Does not insert FIGS
102. on us IC 7700 403 Europe IC 7700 04 France IC 7700 05 Italy IC 7700 06 Spain IC 7700 407 United Kingdom Icom Inc lt Intended Country of Use gt lt Intended Country of Use gt CY DE LT SK LI CZ GR LU SI INO DK HU MT ES CH EE IE NL ISE IBG lt Intended Country of Use gt _1CZ 1 1 32 Kamiminami Hirano ku Osaka 547 0003 Japan Downloaded by RadioAmateur EU
103. operating mode are memorized in the first band stacking register 2 Push again then tune to another frequency and operating mode e This frequency and operating mode are memorized in the second band stacking register 3 Push again then tune to another frequency and operating mode e This frequency and operating mode are memorized in the third band stacking register e When a fourth frequency and operating mode are se lected on a band the first register set in step is over written 3 4 E Frequency setting Tuning with the main dial Band keys EI com HE 200 Main dial Direct frequency entry with the keypad ET com EEE 20 0 O A BE O 5555555 EXAMPLE 7 00000 MHz Push a BASIC OPERATIONS 3 The transceiver has several tuning methods for conve nient frequency tuning 1 Push the desired band key on the keypad 1 3 times e 3 different frequencies can be selected on each band with the band key 2 Rotate the main dial to set the desired fre
104. p 3 10 Switches the multi function digital meter ON and OFF when pushed and held for 1 sec p 3 10 METER rec Pay Te MF3 MULTI FUNCTION 3 SWITCH Ra Selects one of 2 receive RF preamps or bypasses them p 5 9 e P AMP1 activates 10 dB preamp e P AMP2 activates 16 dB high gain pre amp NS v What is the preamp The preamp amplifies signals in the receiver front end to improve S N ratio and sensitivity Select P AMP1 or P AMP2 when receiving weak signals MF4 MULTI FUNCTION 4 SWITCH pe Selects 6 dB 12 dB or 18 dB attenua tor when pushed p 5 9 Turns the attenuator function OFF when pushed and held for 1 sec p 5 9 v What is the attenuator The attenuator prevents a desired signal from being dis torted when very strong signals are near the desired fre quency or when very strong electromagnetic fields such as from a broadcasting station are near your location MF5 MULTI FUNCTION 5 SWITCH Activates and selects fast mid range or slow AGC time constant when pushed p 5 11 e In FM mode only FAST is available Enters the AGC set mode when pushed and held for 1 sec p 5 11 AGC MID 7 AGC time constant can be set between Y 0 1 to 8 0 sec depends on mode or 4 turned OFF When AGC is OFF the 7 S meter does not function v What is the AGC The AGC controls receiver gain to produce a constant au
105. rarrusvennvnnnvanneennvenneennennnennnennnnnnnnennennnennnenee 8 6 Editing programming memory Names asrrunnennnnrnnernnnrnnener 8 6 E Memory clearing rrrrernnennvernvernnernennnnernnnnnnernennnennnennnennnennn 8 6 E Memo Pads rrarennnnnnnenannnnnennnnnnnennnsnnnennnnnnnnsnnsnnnsnnnnnnennnnnnn 8 7 Writing frequencies and operating modes into memo pads 8 7 Calling up a frequency from a memo Pad cece cece eee eens 8 7 8 1 8 MEMORY OPERATION E Memory channels MEMORY CHANNEL NUMBER MEMORY CHANNEL Regular memory 1 channels 99 Scan edge memory channels Using the a v keys CAPABILITY One frequency and one mode in each memory channel The transceiver has 101 memory channels Memory mode is very useful for quickly changing to often used frequencies All 101 memory channels are tunable which means the programmed frequency can be tuned temporarily with the main dial etc in memory mode TRANSFER OVER TOVFO WRITING CLEAR es One frequency and one mode in each memory channel as scan Y Yes No edges for programmed scan E Memory channel selection EE com ES 506 oG OF EI com SSS OF 20 DD Mc
106. scan MENN and decimal points blink while scan ning 6 When the scan detects a signal the scan stops pauses or ignores it depending on the resume set ting and the squelch condition 7 To cancel the scan push F 1 MEMO e Rotating the main dial also cancels the scan 7 2 or more memory channels must be programmed Y for memory scan to start GO Push several times to close a multi func tion screen if necessary 2 Select memory mode 3 Push F 5 SCAN to select the scan screen 4 Set SQL open or closed e See page 9 2 for squelch condition 5 Push F 5 SEL No several times to select the se lect scan number from 1 2 3 and 1 2 x 3 6 Push F 1 MEMO to start the memory scan MEINE and decimal points blink while scan ning 7 Push F 3eSELECT to start select memory scan push F 3 SELECT again to return to memory scan if desired Gazeta blinks instead of CARRA during select memory scan 8 When the scan detects a signal the scan stops pauses or ignores it depending on the resume set ting and the squelch condition 9 To cancel the scan push F 1 MEMO e Rotating the main dial also cancels the scan 7 2 or more memory channels must be designated as 77 select memory channels as well as the same select 7 Scan channel number for select memory scan to 7 start QO QYN E Setting select memory channels Setting in scan screen 1 Ich USB FIL2 14 195 0
107. sec to select the default setting 6 Push to return to the previous indication 7 When the received signal includes a matching tone squelch opens and the signal can be heard e When the received signal s tone does not match tone squelch does not open However the S indicator shows signal strength e To open the squelch manually push XFC Operate the transceiver in the normal way 9 To cancel the tone squelch push TONE to clear TSQL e Available tone frequencies unit Hz 210 7 254 1 E Data mode AFSK operation Band keys C com PT GS GI il YY ao MH ce lt SSS SS 2 o 0 o d 061500 AF SSB Appears FM D1 51 000 00 VFO A FIL1 ART 1 e Tone pair example 2325 Hz 200 Hz 2125 Hz Carrier frequency displayed frequency 4 35 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT When operating AMTOR or PACKET with your TNC and or PC software consult the manual that comes with the TNC and or the software 1 Connect a PC and TNC to the transceiver p 2 9 Q Push a band key to select the desired band 3 Push or to select the desired oper ating mode 4 Push to turn data mode ON e One of D1 D2 or D3 is additionally appears
108. see p 14 10 for details Send read text font color in TX buffer see p 14 10 for details Send read scan speed 0 Low 1 High Send read scan resume 0 OFF 1 ON Send read antenna selection for 0 03 to 1 60 MHz band see p 14 10 for details Send read antenna selection for 1 60 to 2 00 MHz band see p 14 10 for details Send read antenna selection for 2 00 to 6 00 MHz band see p 14 10 for details Send read antenna selection for 6 00 to 8 00 MHz band see p 14 10 for details Send read antenna selection for 8 00 to 11 00 MHz band see p 14 10 for details Send read antenna selection for 11 00 to 15 00 MHz band see p 14 10 for details Send read antenna selection for 15 00 to 20 00 MHz band see p 14 10 for details Send read antenna selection for 20 00 to 22 00 MHz band see p 14 10 for details Send read antenna selection for 22 00 to 26 00 MHz band see p 14 10 for details Send read antenna selection for 26 00 to 30 00 MHz band see p 14 10 for details Send read antenna selection for 30 00 to 45 00 MHz band see p 14 10 for details 14 CONTROL COMMAND Command table continued 1A 050176 050177 050178 050179 050180 050181 050182 050183 050184 050185 06 07 08 09 OA Send read antenna selection for 45 00 to 60 00 MHz band see p 14 10 for details Send read antenna temporary memory set O OFF 1 ON Send read antenna selection 0 OFF 1
109. several times to close a multi func tion screen if necessary 5 Push F 7 SET to select set mode menu screen 6 Push F 5 OTHERS to enter Others set mode 7 Push F 1 A several times to select the Calibra tion Marker item Rotate the main dial clockwise to turn the calibra tion marker ON 9 Push once to return to set mode menu screen Push F 2 ACC to enter accessory set mode AD Push F 2 W several times to select the REF Ad just item 2 Rotate the main dial to adjust for a zero beat with the received standard signal as shown at left e Zero beat means that two signals are exactly the same frequency resulting in a single tone being emitted 3 Turn the calibration marker OFF in Others set mode Push twice to exit set mode 13 MAINTENANCE E Opening the transceiver s case MT T titi EEE zk tii PP PP AG 2 a lA BEE PE GM Z cot eZ P GE JPEG EISEAN LE LLL GME PP ALD Follow the case opening procedures shown here when you want to replace the clock backup battery or inter nal fuse 7 CAUTION DISCONNECT the AC power cable 7 from the transceiver before performing any work on 77 the transceiver Otherwise there is danger of elec G tric shock and or equipment damage Z CAUTION The transceiver weighs approx 24 kg 77 53 Ib Always have two people available to lift or f turn over the transceiver 1 Remove the rack mou
110. shifting frequency appear when the func tion is ON 2 Rotate the RIT ATX control e Push and hold for 1 sec to reset the RIT fre quency e Push momentarily to reset the RIT frequency when the quick RIT ATX clear function is ON p 12 15 e Push and hold for 1 sec to add the shift fre quency to the operating frequency When the RIT function is ON pushing and holding XFC allows you to monitor the operating frequency directly RIT is temporarily cancelled For your convenience Calculate function The shift frequency of the RIT function can be added subtracted to the displayed frequency While displaying the RIT shift frequency push and hold for 1 sec Downloaded by RadioAmateur EU 5 10 FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE 5 E AGC function The AGC auto gain control controls receiver gain to produce a constant audio output level even when the received signal strength varies greatly The transceiver has 3 preset AGC characteristics time constant fast mid slow for non FM mode 7 The FM mode AGC time constant is fixed as FAST TE G 0 1 sec and AGC time constant cannot be AGC control 7 changed Selecting the preset value M Select any non
111. split function is ON by default For your con venience it can be turned OFF in Others set mode p 12 12 In this case the switch does not equalize the transmit frequency to the receive fre quency NM Suppose you are operating at 21 290 MHz USB in VFO mode 2 Push and hold for 1 sec e Split frequency operation is turned ON e The transmit frequency unselected VFO s readout is equalized to the receive frequency selected VFO s read out T27 indicator appears 3 Enter the desired offset frequency from the keypad then push SPLIT or set the transmit frequency with the main dial while pushing XFC ANER indicator appears when is pushed e Offset frequency setting with the keypad example To transmit on 1 kHz higher frequency Push F INPewr then SPLIT To transmit on 3 kHz lower frequency Push FNPenr GENE then SPLIT The split lock function is convenient for changing only the transmit frequency When the split lock function is not used accidentally releasing XFC while rotating the main dial changes the receive frequency The split lock function is ON by default but can be turned OFF in set mode p 12 13 1 While split frequency operation is ON push LOCK to activate the split lock function 2 While pushing XFC rotate the main dial to change the transmit frequency e If you accidentally release XFC while rotating the main dial the receive frequency does
112. the main dial set screw into the screw hole of the main dial then tighten the screw until the screw extends into the shaft hole out slightly using sup plied hexagonal wrench 2 mm Fig 2 e Be careful that the screw does not extend out more than 1 mm 1 32 in 4 Attach the main dial as illustrated Fig 3 e Be careful to match the correct orientation of the flat face of the shaft and the screw hole of the dial knob Tighten the screw using supplied hexagonal wrench as illustrated Fig 3 6 Install the rubber cover of the main dial Fig 4 Then adjust the main dial brake as desired v When re packing and shipping the transceiver Slide the dial brake adjustment to the right position then detach the main dial when re packing and ship ping the transceiver at any time 2 2 2 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS E Rack mounting handle detachment FH Flat head PH Pan head FH M4x9 mm FH M4x15 mm 2 3 The rack mounting handles are supplied attached to the transceiver to stabilize the transceiver in the shock absorber material in the box If you want to remove them use the supplied screws as described below 1 Remove the six screws from the rack mounting han dles on both side and remove the rack mounting handles 2 Tighten the supplied six screws PH M4x8 on both sides of the front panel and side panel to hide the screw holes on both sides
113. to display the PSK decode screen 2 Push F 1 lt MENU1 gt to select PSK decode second menu 3 Push F 2 B QPSK to toggle between BPSK and QPSK mode alternately Functions for the PSK decoder indication ET com CI Sees or cd m oO s682 O22 o l A 30 O ease ry EL OG AGC PSK DECODE BPSK BFO 14 008 500 poor PSK Encode Decode Monitor soon Ty 1500 MID PSK31 BPSK OPSK Keyboard TX or Memor y TX supper ted 1 4 MIX fa marae tere x Gch TX X Menor y byrli 1n FR Data Saving o USB Mem r Y supp ed OFF 54 50 vart THRESHOLD f s 1 MYCALLX2 3 0SLURS99 OF 2 MYCALLx3 4 DE UR599 MENU1 gt HOLD CLR AFC NET TX MEM e AFC NET indications ANT F BW 500 hi SFT D METER Po PAMP 1 ATT OFF i HB AGC wat PSK Encode Decode Monitor poor mio f PSK31 BPSK OPS K LE il Wax 70 Character oh Ach TX Meme WET OFF _ Data Saving to USB Wen mory SUPPO VEL THRESHOLD the 1 MYGALLx2 SLAGS OF 2 MYGALLX3 4 DE UR5S59 lt MENU1 gt HOLD CLA AFC NET TX MEM ADJ WIDE AFC and NET indicators Offset frequency amp Setting the decoder threshold level AGC PSK DECODE BPSK BFO 1
114. voice mic record screen indication push F 5 NAME to enter memory name edit condition e A cursor appears and blinks 3 Push F 7 T1 T4 several times to select the desired voice message 4 Input the desired character by rotating the main dial or by pushing the band key for number input e Push ABC MF6 or abc MF6 to toggle capital and small letters e Push 123 MF7 or Symbol MF7 to toggle numerals and symbols e Push F 1 4 or F 2 P for cursor movement e Push F 3 DEL to delete the selected character e Push F 4 SPACE to input a space e Pushing the transceiver s keypad 0 9 can also enter numerals 5 Push to input and set the name e The cursor disappears 6 Repeat steps to amp to program another voice message s name if desired 7 Push twice to exit the voice recorder screen e Usable characters Key selection Editable characters B A to Z capital letters a to z small letters 2 0 to 9 numbers Sr IHH N4 synee lt gt QOI T T 7 VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS E Sending a recorded message EE fcom DAS 500 3 20 OG 10 3034 UTC 10 30 USD USB FIL2 14 100 00 1 10 120 00 CW VOICE RECORDER VFO A ANT TX LEVEL I
115. while transmitting RECEIVE INDICATOR RX Lights green while receiving a signal and when the squelch is open amp LCD FUNCTION DISPLAY p 1 14 Shows the operating frequency function switch menus spectrum scope screen memory list screen set mode settings etc SPLIT OPERATION INDICATOR SPLIT Lights during split frequency operation LOCK INDICATOR LOCK p 5 17 Lights when the dial lock function is activated TRANSMIT FREQUENCY CHECK SWITCH XFC p 6 6 Monitors the transmit frequency including ATX fre quency offset when pushed and held during split fre quency operation While pushing this switch the transmit frequency can be changed with the main dial keypad memo pad or a _v switches e When the split lock function is turned ON pushing XFC cancels the dial lock function p 6 7 MEMORY UP DOWN SWITCHES v p 8 2 Push to select the desired memory channel e Memory channels can be selected both in VFO and memory modes KEYPAD Pushing a key selects the operating band p 3 4 e selects the general coverage band Pushing the same key 2 or 3 times calls up other stacked frequencies in the band p 3 4 Icom s triple band stacking register memorizes 3 fre quencies in each band gt After pushing FJNPenTt enters a frequency or memory channel Pushing or a v is necessary to end the entry pgs 3 5 8 2 e g to enter 14 195 MHz
116. you may hear Y noise This comes from the DSP unit and does Y not indicate a malfunction Sensitivity increases SSN Sensitivity decreases NOISE BLANKER SWITCH p 5 16 Switches the noise blanker ON and OFF when pushed The noise blanker reduces pulse type noise such as that generated by automobile igni tion systems This function cannot be used in FM mode or non pulse type noise e The NB indicator above this switch lights green while the function is activated Enters blanking width set mode when pushed and held for 1 sec DRIVE GAIN CONTROL DRIVE p 3 13 Adjusts the transmitter level at the driver stage Ac tive in all modes other than SSB mode with COMP OFF A G Increases Push Decreases D COMPRESSION LEVEL CONTROL COMP p 6 5 Adjusts the speech compression level in SSB A G Compression G Push gain increases Compression H gain decreases MONITOR GAIN CONTROL MONI GAIN p 6 4 Adjusts the transmit IF signal monitor level Monitor gain A Push IS increases Monitor gain C decreases PANEL DESCRIPTION 1 VOX GAIN CONTROL VOX GAIN p 6 2 Adjusts the transmit receive switching threshold level for VOX operation Q Low sensitivity High S sensitivity ANTI VOX CONTROL ANTI VOX p 6 2 Adjusts the VOX sensitivity to speaker audio to pre vent unwanted VOX activation A G Less sensitive me Push SG and confirm proper operation
117. 0 VFO A 14 195 00 USB SCAN 4F Center AF Span Recall MEMORY Select No 1 lt _ MHZ AF SELECT AF SPAN SEL No RECALL Setting in memory list screen 1 ich USB a 14 195 00 VFO A 14 195 00 USB 0 500 000 LSB FIL2 SCAN EDGE 29 999 999 USB FIL2 SCAN EDGE 14 195 000 USB 1 Ich USB FIL2 14 195 00 VFO A 14 195 00 USB JR SCAN EDGE xx MEMORY SELEGT All Clear wwx SCAN EDGE Push amp Hold 1 1 All Clear 2 2 All Clear 3 All Clear 1 2 3 All Clear 3 41 2 3 3 1 2 3 9 7 scans 9 1 Push several times to close a multi func tion screen if necessary 2 Select memory mode 3 Push F 5 SCAN to select the scan screen 4 Select the desired memory channel to set as a se lect memory channel A v keys and direct keypad selections can be used Push F 3eSELECT several times to set the mem ory channel as a select memory 1 2 3 or not Repeat steps to to program another memory channel as a select memory channel 7 Push EXIT SET to exit the scan screen 1 Push several times to close a multi func tion screen if necessary 2 Push F 4 MEMORY to select memory list screen 3 Rotate the main dial while pushing F 1 ROLL or F 2 SET to select the desired memory channel A wi keys and direct keypad selections can be used 4 Push F 3 SELECT several times to set the mem ory channel as a select memory
118. 0 000 Sao BE 6 7555 O m0000 0 e Noise reduction p 5 17 Push to turn the noise reduction ON and OFF e Rotate NR control to adjust the noise reduction level e Noise reduction indicator above switch lights when the noise reduction is ON e Manual notch filter p 5 18 Push to turn the manual notch function ON and OFF e Rotate NOTCH control to set the attenuating fre quency e Notch indicator above switch lights when the manual notch is ON e AGC auto gain control p 5 11 Push AGC switch several times to select AGC FAST AGC MID or AGC SLOW Push to turn the AGC time constant manual setting ON and OFF e Rotate AGC control to adjust the time constant e 14 function p 3 6 gt Push 1 4 to turn the 14 function ON and OFF Received characters are occasionally garbled when the received signal has Mark and Space tones re versed This reversal can be caused by incorrect TNC connections setting commands etc To receive re versed RTTY signals correctly select RTTY R mode During RTTY mode push and hold for 1 sec to select RTTY and RTTY R mode The twin peak filter changes audio frequency response by
119. 00 piang anamo upiana SFT 0 Poo 1 50 00 150 200 Bow VFO A AI FiL2 14 7100 00 RTTY DECODE 10 5809 UTC 10 58 BPF van F 2125 170 45bps BAUDOT Mark 2125Hz Shift 17 Hr Keyboard TX or Memory TX supported Max 7 Characters x Sch TX Menor y o Lt in Data Saving to USB Memory Suppor te THRESHOLD amp 1 MYCALL x2 2 MYCALLx3 3 QSLURS99 4 DE URSS9 HOLD CLR ATTY DECODE 45bo6 BAUDOT Mark 212 Shit 17 Hz Keyboard TX or Memo ry TX Suppo fled Wax 7 Character ch TX Hemor y built in Data I Saving to usa Memar Y Supp d PIFRE z s EE 4 MYGALLA2 OSLURS95 2 MYGALL x F DE UR599 DEF WIDE RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4 1 Push a band key to select the desired band 2 Push to select RTTY e After RTTY mode is selected push and hold for 1 sec to toggle between RTTY and RTTY R modes e RTTY or RI TY R appears 3 Push F 3eDECODE to display the decode screen e When tuned into an RTTY signal decoded characters are displayed in the RX contents screen 4 Push F 2 HOLD CLR to freeze the current screen e HOLD appears while the function is in use e Push F 2 HOLD CLR again to release the function 5 Push and hold F 2 HOLD CLR for 1 sec to clear the displayed characters HOLD indicator disappears at the same time when the hold function is in use 6 Push F 7 WIDE to toggle the RTTY decode screen size from normal and wide e S RF meter type during wide screen in
120. 00 200 300 default and 500 Hz Higher freq 2500 2700 default 2800 and 2900 Hz 500 2500 Lower freq 100 200 300 and 500 Hz default Higher freq 2500 default 2700 2800 and 2900 Hz E ACC set mode ACC AF Output Level Sets the desired audio output level output from ACC1 within O to 100 in 1 steps S PDIF Output Level Sets the desired output level of S P DIF within 0 to 100 in 1 steps default 100 ACC MOD Level Sets the desired audio input level for modulation from ACC 1 S PDIF MOD Level Sets the desired input level for modulation from S P DIF within 0 to 100 in 1 steps default 50 DATA OFF MOD Selects the desired connector s for modulation input when data mode is not in use DATA1 MOD Selects the desired connector s for modulation input when data 1 mode D1 is in use DATA2 MOD Selects the desired connector s for modulation input when data 2 mode D2 is in use 12 7 12 SET MODE ZZE 50 e Outputs approx 200 mV at 50 default setting 100 ZZE 50 e Approx 100 mV at 50 default setting MIC ACC e MIC e ACC e MIC ACC Use the signals from MIC Use the signals from ACC1 pin 4 Use the signals from MIC and ACC1 pin 4 default e S P DIF Use the signals from S P DIF ACC e MIC e ACC Use the signals from MIC Use the signals from ACC1 pin 4 default Use the signals from MIC
121. 1 Selecting the preset value rrarrunnnaanenannnnvenavnnnvenannnanennne 5 11 Adjusting the AGC time Constant ranrenannnnnennnnnnnennnnnnvennnr 5 11 Setting the AGC time constant preset value rranannnnnnvennrr 5 11 E Twin PBT operation arannannnennnnennnnnnnnnnnnnenannennnnnnnnnnnnnnsnner 5 12 Mi IF filter selection rannnnnaanannrnannnnnnnnnnnnannnnannnennnnennnnnnnnnnner 5 13 Q IF filter selection oo ccc cece cence cena eee cease eeaeeeeesaeeeens 5 13 Filter passband width setting except FM mode 5 13 Roofing filter selection c cece cece cece ee eeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeaeeas 5 14 S DSP TINGE Shape sake panaemeccsdorsncceecmseccidiacdoecee ounces 5 14 Filter shape Set mode ccccceec eee eeee sees esse eeeeeseeeanenanes 5 14 M Noise blanker o oo eee ccc c cece eee ee eee ee eee eeeeeeesaeeeegeeeeeaaeeesaaes 5 16 O NB SCl 100 0 gt JE eaeeenee 5 16 E Noise FEQUCIION ee 5 17 WE Dial lock function EEE 5 17 MOCAN sraa E TEE 5 18 E DIGWMASCICCION ssrisiserissrircussns serice PEENI RARER ERORKETA EN IEN EEEERY 5 18 E Autotune ae 110 EE 5 19 5 1 5 FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE E Spectrum scope screen Center mode VFO A USB FIL2 14 100 000
122. 1 3 E Setting sleep timer ae 11 4 E imer se ENE ERAAN 11 4 11 1 11 CLOCK AND TIMERS E Time set mode EDIT VET The IC 7700 has a built in calendar and 24 hour clock accuracy 75 sec per month with daily power ON OFF timer functions Before operating these timer functions set the current date and time 1 Push EXIT SET to close multi function screen if AN Cc IC HE qo 5 a EXIT SET Main dial DEF Date Sets the date Time Now Sets the local time CLOCK2 Function Turns the CLOCK2 indicator ON and OFF CLOCK2 is convenient to indicate UTC or other coun try s local time etc CLOCK2 Offset Sets the desired off set time period for CLOCK2 dis play within 24 00 to 24 00 in 5 min steps CLOCK2 Name Sets the desired 3 character name for CLOCK2 Capital letters small letters numerals some symbols 4S N amp Y A4 H lt gt 1 O and spaces can be used necessary 2 Push F 7 SET to select set mode menu screen 3 Push F 4 TIME to select time set mode 4 Push F 1 A or F 2 to select the desired item 5 Rotate the main dial to set or select the desired value or condition 6 Push to exit time set mode A 1 1 Sat 1 Push F 3 gt to select be
123. 160 THRESHOLD B T MYCALL x2 2 MYCALL 3 4 DE HURSS8 VSC OFF B OPSK MENU Z gt SET WIDE 4 22 e Twin PBT passband tuning p 5 12 Rotate TWIN PBT controls inner outer e PBT indicator above switch lights when PBT is in use e Push and hold for 1 sec to clear the set tings e AGC auto gain control p 5 11 Push AGC switch several times to select AGC FAST AGC MID or AGC SLOW Push to turn the AGC time constant manual setting ON and OFF e Rotate AGC control to adjust the time constant e Manual notch filter p 5 18 Push to turn the manual notch function ON and OFF e Rotate NOTCH control to set the attenuating fre quency e Notch indicator above switch lights when the manual notch is ON e Fine tuning p 3 7 During PSK make sure that the kHz tuning step function is OFF no W indication push and hold TS for 1 sec e PSK may not be decoded correctly using the 10 Hz step tuning e 14 function p 3 6 Push 1 4 to turn the 14 function ON and OFF BPSK and QPSK modes are available for PSK31 e BPSK Binary Phase Shift Keying mode is the most commonly used mode e QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying mode has error correction capability to provide better decoding than BPSK mode in marginal condition However more accurate tuning is required with QPSK mode due to the tight phase margin of QPSK 1 During PSK mode selection push F 3 DECODE
124. 4 008 500 goats or PSK Encode Decode Monitor 3000 Ty 1500 MID PSK31 BPSK OPE I Keyboard rx or Menor ry TX supper ted 1 4 Wax 78 Characters x Gch TX Hemos ry buili i er Data Saving to USB Mem r y supp rte d vec nee 1 MYGALLx2 3 OSLURS99 OF 2 MYCALLx3 4 DE UR599 WIDE 4 23 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4 1 Push a band key to select the desired band 2 Push to select PSK e After PSK mode is selected push and hold for 1 sec to toggle between PSK and PSK R modes e PSK or PSK R appears 3 Push F 3eDECODE to display the decode screen e When tuned into a PSK signal decoded characters are displayed in the RX contents screen 4 Push F 2 HOLD CLR to freeze the current screen e HOLD appears while the function is in use e Push F 2 HOLD CLR again to release the function 5 Push and hold F 2 HOLD CLR for 1 sec to clear the displayed characters HOLD indicator disappears at the same time when the hold function is in use 6 Push F 3 AFC NET to turn the AFC function ON Wey appears e If a PSK signal is received within the AFC tuning range the decoder automatically tunes into the signal and the offset frequency is displayed e The AFC tuning range is set to 15 Hz as the default Optional 8 Hz setting is available in PSK decode set mode p 4 26 NOTE The AFC function may not tune the signal properly when a weak PSK signal is received 7 Push F 3eAFC NET
125. 4 7 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT Memory keyer screen CG TEST GG TEST DE ICOM ICOM TEST UR smv BX CFM TU ORZ 4 8 Pre set characters can be sent using the keyer send menu Contents of the memory keyer are set using the edit menu e Transmitting 1 During CW mode operation push F 3 eKEYER to select memory keyer screen 2 Push to set the transceiver to transmit or set the break in function ON p 6 3 3 Push one of the function keys F 1 M1 to F 4 M4 to send the contents of the memory keyer e Pushing and holding a function key for 1 sec repeatedly sends the contents push any function key to cancel the transmission e The contest serial number counter is incremented each time the contents are sent e Push F 5 1 to reduce the contest serial number count by 1 when resending contents to unanswered calls YY I D gt yy D D X mmp D 5 D x D lt G D O n o O 5 5 D O gt D o pie O m x lt KEYPAD connector on the rear panel the pro grammed contents M1 M4 can be transmitted without selecting the memory keyer screen 4 See p 2 7 for details 4 Push EXIT SET twice to return to normal screen RK QQ AQAA Editing a mem
126. 5 255 0 16 6 IP address setting EI com DET 20 OG 2900 D Mm ce Cet o o 909 pen Gl VY Transceive R5 232C Function Decode Baud Rate pr Keyboard Type WIDE Keyboard Repeat Delay Keyboard Repeat Rate AM IP Address Valid after Reboot OFF Subnet Mask Valid after Reboot ik kl A F Gl VY Transceive R5 232C Function Decode Baud Rate Keyboard Type Keyboard Repeat Delay Keyboard Repeat Rate JP Address Valid after Reboot Subnet Mask Valid after Reboot _ 7 DEF 16 7 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE 16 When updating the firmware from the USB Memory the following settings are not necessary G IMPORTANT A fixed static IP address is used for ZY the IC 7700 Zhen you connect the IC 7700 to a LAN ask the Z network manager about a usable assignable IP h address and the subnet mask in advance 7 NEVER use an IP address that has already been G used with another device in the network If the IP 7 address is duplicated the network will crash GO Push several times to close a multi func tion screen if necessary 2 Push F 7 SET to select set mode menu screen 3 Push F 5 OTHERS to select Others set mode 4 Push F 1 A F 2 several times to select IP Ad dress item
127. 6 Adjust the noise blanker threshold level e To use this control push NB Shallow AGC VOLUME SWITCH p 5 11 Push to toggle AGC control usage ON and OFF e Use AGC control to set the AGC time constant when switched ON e The AGC VR indicator above this switch lights green when the control is ON Turns the AGC function OFF when pushed and held for 1 sec 1 4 MONI GAIN Q VOX GAIN ANTI VOX Q Arm CONTRAST BRIGHT VOICE MEMORY USB Universal Serial Bus CONNECTOR USB p 2 4 Insert USB Memory for both reading storing a wide variety of the transceiver s information and data e The indicator above the connectors lights or blinks when the transceiver reads or writes to the memory data e Unmount operation is necessary before removing the USB Memory p 12 25 Connects a PC keyboard for RTTY and PSK31 operations e USB keyboard is supported USB Memory or USB keyboard is not supplied by Icom NOISE REDUCTION SWITCH p 5 17 Push to switch DSP noise reduction ON and OFF e The NR indicator above this switch lights green when the function is activated AF CONTROL AF inner control p 3 9 Varies the audio output level of the speaker or headphones Audio output increases Audio output decreases amp RF GAIN CONTROL RF outer control p 3 9 Adjusts the RF gain level Y While rotating the RF gain control
128. 8 V out puts of ACC 1 and ACC 2 max 1 A in total CEE eo 1 PANEL DESCRIPTION TRANSVERTER CONNECTOR X VERTER p 2 6 External transverter input output connector Activated by voltage applied to ACC 2 pin 6 or when the transverter function is in use pgs 2 11 RECEIVE ANTENNA IN RX ANT IN RECEIVE ANTENNA OUT RX ANT OUT Located between the transmit receive switching cir cuit and receiver s RF stage Connects an external unit such as preamplifier or RF filter using BNC connectors if desired When no external unit is connected RX ANT IN and RX ANT OUT must be deactivated and shorted by the switching relay internally This set ting is available on the antenna set screen p 10 5 Transmit Receive switching circuit Receiver I PANEL DESCRIPTION E LCD display S RF METER pgs 3 10 3 11 Shows the signal strength while receiving Shows the relative output power SWR ALC or compres sion levels while transmitting e A total of 3 meter types are available e Standard meter 5 10 S 0 50 100 450 15 D 10 200 A A lt E 250 SWR 44 52V VD e Edgewise meter e Bar meter 5 13579 100 150 200 250W Po 0 10 50 men SFT 0 BPF MN TPF RIT OTA Q e RTTY poo M 14 100 00 10 120 00 CW SPECTRUM SCOPE CENTER Grid 5k 10dB 25k 5 10 HOLD GENT FIX
129. 93 0MB EDIT FILE MAME RTOG2701 TXT DIR FILE OPTION SAVE Decode file save screen file name edit DECODE FILE SAVE 493 0M8 FILE NAME 6F506270 KE SPACE SAVE OPTION a TT e U lt gt O TE O ll ar MO D m C fcom O 3838 q O Seu XS B oo oo da o OBO ike EE Main dial WIDE 4 20 The contents of the RT TY memory and received sig nal can be saved into the USB Memory 1 During RTTY decode screen indication push F 1 lt MENU1 gt to select the RT TY decode second menu 2 Push F 5 SAVE to select decode file save screen 3 Change the following conditions if desired e File name 1 Push F 4 EDIT to select file name edit con dition e Push F 1 DIR FILE several times to select the file name if necessary Push ABC MF6 123 or Symbol MF7 to select the character group then rotate the main dial to select the character e ABC MF6 A to Z capital letters 123 MF7 0 to 9 numerals Symbol MF7 amp _ can be selected e Push F 1 lt 0 to move the cursor left push F 2 P to move the cursor right F 3 DEL delete a char acter and push F 4 SPACE to insert a space Push to set the file name e File format 1 Push F 5 OPTION to enter save option screen 2 Rotate the main dial to select the saving for mat from Text to HTML e Text i
130. AGC MID or AGC SLOW Push to turn the AGC time constant manual setting ON and OFF e Rotate AGC control to adjust the time constant e Auto tuning function p 5 19 Push AUTOTUNE to turn the auto tuning func tion ON and OFF e The transceiver automatically tunes the desired sig nal within 5 kHz range IMPORTANT When receiving a weak signal or receiving a signal with interference the automatic tuning function may not tune or may tune to an undesired signal 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT Convenient functions for transmit e VOX voice operated transmit p 6 2 gt Push to turn the VOX function ON and OFF e appears when the VOX function is ON Transmit quality monitor p 6 4 Push to turn the monitor function ON and OFF e Rotate MONI GAIN to adjust the monitor gain e Monitor indicator above switch lights when the monitor function is ON 4 30 e Audio tone control p 12 5 Push F 7 SET then F 1 LEVEL to enter level set mode Select an item with F 1 A F 2 W then rotate the main dial to adjust the audio tone E Operating FM MIC Band keys TX indicator RX indicator co O O CONS DE osoo To s O AF in di Appears BW 15k
131. Antenna memory setting rrrnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnrnenrnnnnnennnnennennn 14 10 14 1 14 CONTROL COMMAND E Remote jack CI V information CI V connection example The transceiver can be connected through an optional IC 7700 p CT 17 Cl V LEVEL CONVERTER to a PC equipped with an m RS 232C port The Icom Communications Interface V CI V controls the transceiver Up to 4 Icom Cl V transceivers or receivers can be connected to a PC equipped with an RS 232C port See p 12 17 for setting the CI V condition using set CT 17 personal mode computer o lIl a EG O0 20 mini plug cable Data format The CI V system can be operated using the following data formats Data formats differ according to com mand numbers A data area or sub command is added for some commands Controller to IC 7700 OK message to controller z Al T D gt om 6 22 ES TE D B og QX 9 og pL CL FR 25 26 PE oo 22 Go oS Ga og 22 22 cu oc mo og og oF 22 5 og Er 93 o8 ve FE oo DE E g og DE Oo ae cE EE OSE E D o 5 se as o E ae cs 553 eo ES sce 5g 2S 5S lt a se 50 S cf og 2 65 Qo 5 OO a5 og Sf 87 38 Ro Es Og O25 Z a m 5 2 Z og 29 mo EE ze W YW pest ms l D IC 7700 to controller NG m
132. Antenna tuner operation The internal automatic antenna tuner matches the transceiver to the connected antenna automatically After the tuner matches an antenna the variable ca pacitor settings are memorized as a preset point for each frequency range 100 kHz steps Therefore when you change the frequency range the variable ca pacitors are automatically preset to the memorized set ting 7 CAUTION NEVER transmit with the tuner ON when 7 no antenna is connected This will damage the 7 transceiver Be careful of the antenna selection Tuner operation gt Push to turn the internal antenna tuner ON The antenna is tuned automatically when the an tenna SWR is higher than 1 5 1 e When the tuner is ON TUNER switch indicator lights green Ge y e While tuning TUNER switch indicator blinks green J J O O NOTES e NEVER transmit without an antenna properly con nected to antenna port in use e When 2 or more antennas are connected select the antenna to be used with ANT e If the SWR is higher than about 1 5 1 when tuning above 100 kHz on an antenna s preset point push and hold for 1 sec to start manual tuning e T
133. B Blue and rotate the ratio from 0 to 255 range e The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale MID 7 NOTE The waveform may be displayed incorrect 7 ly with FAST setting MID 7 NOTE The waveform may be displayed incorrect 7 ly with FAST setting 5 FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE Scope set mode continued 25k Select the sweep speed for the 25 kHz span selec tion from SLOW MID and FAST 50k Select the sweep speed for the 50 kHz span selec tion from SLOW MID and FAST 100k Select the sweep speed for the 100 kHz span selec tion from SLOW MID and FAST 250k Select the sweep speed for the 250 kHz span selec tion from SLOW MID and FAST Fixed Edges 0 03 1 60 Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode for bands below 1 6 MHz 1 60 2 00 Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode scope when the 1 6 to 2 MHz band is selected 2 00 6 00 Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode scope when the 2 to 6 MHz band is selected 6 00 8 00 Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode scope when the 6 to 8 MHz band is selected 5 6 0 750 1 250 MHz e Set the frequencies within 0 030 to 1 600 MHz range in 1 kHz steps 7 Up to 500 kHz band width can be specified so Y either edge frequency will be set to the difference Y between higher and lower frequencies from 5 to Y 500 kHz automatically while setting
134. CANCEL SETTING LOAD ak COMPLETED sos SETTING Reboot the IC 7 TOO 491 0M8 SETT SE SETOT DAT DIR FILE LOAD OPTION SORT 12 23 SETMODE 12 By loading the saved setting file from the USB Mem ory you can easily set up another IC 7700 several operators settings can easily be applied to one IC 7700 1 During set mode menu screen indication push F 7 USB to select USB set menu screen 2 Push F 1 LOAD to select setting load screen e The indicator above the USB connectors and USB in dicator on the display blink e After the USB Memory contents are displayed the indi cators stop blinking 3 Push F 5 OPTION to select load option set mode then set the desired loading conditions if desired e See page 12 21 for details 4 Push F 2 amp or F 3 V to select the desired set ting file 6 Push F 4 LOAD e Confirmation screen appears 6 Push F 6 OK to starts loading e After the loading is completed the message dialog Re boot the IC 7700 appears 7 Turn the transceiver power OFF then ON to make the setting effective 12 SET MODE E Changing a file name WIDE GANGEN DIR FILE DIR FILE NESTEN Cann JASYU ud SET
135. D to freeze the current spectrum waveform HOLD appears while the function is in use e The peak hold function can be deactivated in scope set mode Push to exit the scope screen 7 NOTE If a strong signal is received a ghost wave form may appear Push F 2 ATT several times to activate the spectrum scope attenuator in this case QQ The scope bandwidth can be specified for each op erating frequency band independently in scope set mode pgs 5 6 to 5 8 SSN 5 FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE Mini scope screen indication The mini scope screen can be displayed with another screen display such as set mode menu decode screen memory list screen etc simultaneously Ske SS o _ 1 Set the scope mode center or fixed marker at SS tenuator span etc in advance pgs 5 2 5 3 pe Push to toggle the mini scope indication O J 2 ON and OFF i Sls OQ The S RF meter type during mini scope indication can orde be selected in display set mode Meter Type Wide 2 0060000 mo Ol Screen item p 12 10 12 0149 UTC 12 01 USB Q 19 DU Au O0 20 20 W VFO A USB FIL2 14 ubelenele SPECTRUM SCOPE CENTER Grid 5k 10d8
136. DAILY TIMER AGT DAY REPEAT OWN OFF Meh TIMER I pr TIMER WIDE TIMERS TIMER IC TIMERS OFF 2007 7 SiMon 10 18 TIMER1 TIMER2 TIMERS TIMER4 TIMERS DAILY TIMER ACT TIMER Wead OFF TIMER TIMERS TIMER TIMERS k CLOCK AND TIMERS II The transceiver turns power ON and or OFF automat ically on the specified day and time with the specified frequency settings 1 Push several times to close multi function screen if necessary 2 Push and hold for 1 sec to select timer set screen 3 Push one of F 1 TIMER1 to F 5 TIMERS5 to se lect the desired timer 4 Rotate the main dial to select the timer action ON and OFF 5 Push F 2 P to select the DAY cell then rotate the main dial to select the desired day of the week e Select not to specify the day of the week The timer will function every day in this case e Once a day of the week is selected push F 4 CLR to select 6 Push F 2 P to select the REPEAT cell then ro tate the main dial to select the repeat function ON and OFF e ON The timer functions every selected day of the week repeats e OFF The timer does not repeat 7 Push F 2 P to select the ON cell then rotate the main dial to set the desired transceiver power ON time e When using power OFF timer only push F 4 CLR to select This setting cannot be set when the power OFF timer is set to
137. DEL Qh hc MA oot ER OSL DE ICOM ICOM UR 568 599 BK SPACE r AUTO TX PE 4 16 Pre set characters can be sent using the RTTY mem ory Contents of the memory are set using the edit menu 1 During RTTY mode operation push F 3 DECODE to select RTTY decode screen Q Push F 4 TX MEM to select RTTY memory screen 3 Push F 7 1 4 5 8 to select memory bank then push one of the function keys F 1 RT1 to F 4 RT4 or F 1 RT5 to F 4 RT8 e When no keyboard is connected the selected memory contents will be transmitted immediately e When a keyboard is connected the memory contents will be transmitted immediately when function key is pushed or transmitted after F12 on the connected key board is pressed depending on auto transmission re ception setting see below e The transmission date time reception date and or time may be displayed in RX contents screen depending on setting 1 During RTTY mode operation push F 3 DECODE to select RTTY decode screen Push F 4 TX MEM to select RTTY memory screen then push F 6 EDIT to select RTTY mem ory edit screen e RTTY memory contents of the Channel 1 RT1 is se lected 3 Push F 7 RT1 RT8 several times to select the de sired RTTY memory 4 Push F 6 AUTO TX several times to select the de sired condition as follow e AUTO TX RX Automatically transmits the se lected memory and returns to re ceive after t
138. FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE Scope set mode continued 26 00 30 00 28 000 28 500 MHz Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode scope e Set the frequencies within 26 000 to 30 000 MHz when the 26 to 30 MHz band is selected range in 1 kHz steps 7 Up to 500 kHz band width can be specified so either edge frequency will be set to the difference between higher and lower frequencies from 5 to Y 500 kHz automatically while setting another edge 77 frequency 30 00 45 00 30 000 30 500 MHz Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode scope Set the frequencies within 30 000 to 45 000 MHz when the 30 to 45 MHz band is selected range in 1 kHz steps 7 Up to 500 kHz band width can be specified so 7 either edge frequency will be set to the difference 7 between higher and lower frequencies from 5 to 7 500 kHz automatically while setting another edge G frequency 45 00 60 00 50 000 50 500 MHz Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode scope Set the frequencies within 45 000 to 60 000 MHz when the 45 to 60 MHz band is selected range in 1 kHz steps 7 Up to 500 kHz band width can be specified so Y either edge frequency will be set to the difference 7 between higher and lower frequencies from 5 to 500 kHz automatically while setting another edge 7 frequency 5 8 E Preamplifier O com EGG 20 Oc E Attenuator EI com
139. HF 50 MHz TRANSCEIVER IC 7700 Instruction Manual Downloaded by TE RadioAmateur EU Printed in Japan O 2007 Icom Inc FOREWORD IMPORTANT Thank you for making the IC 7700 your radio of choice We hope you agree with Icom s philosophy of technology first Many hours of research and development went into the design of your IC 7700 gt FEATURES O Ultimate receiver performance third order intercept IP3 of 40 dBm HF bands only O Built in Baudot RT TY and PSK31 modulator demodulator and direct PC keyboard connection capability for RT TY and PSK31 operation without a PC O High resolution spectrum scope center frequency and fixed frequency modes plus mini scope displays READ THIS INSTRUCTION MANUAL CAREFULLY before at tempting to operate the transceiver SAVE THIS INSTRUCTION MANUAL This manual contains im portant safety and operating instructions for the IC 7700 EXPLICIT DEFINITIONS TRADEMARKS A WARNING a injury fire hazard or electric shock may CAUTION Equipment damage may occur If disregarded inconvenience only No risk of person NOTE oa al injury fire or electric shock Icom Icom Inc and the com logo are registered trademarks of Icom Incorporated Japan in the United States the United Kingdom Germany France Spain Russia and or other countries PRECAUTIONS A WARNING HIGH RF VOLTAGE NEVER attach an antenna or internal antenna connector during transmission This
140. I SEL control to suit your preference RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4 E Electronic keyer functions The IC 7700 has a number of convenient functions for Er gt Q the built in electronic keyer ape I 1 During CW mode push several times to ONE 6 normal screen if necessary eS 2 Push F 3eKEYER to select memory keyer screen To 3 Push to select memory keyer menu screen 4 Push one of the LCD function switches F 1 to F 4 to select the desired menu See the diagram below e Push to return to the previous display cw FIL2 14 100 00 VOICE KEYER MEMORY SCAN Fi re fs Fa rs fe Fr e Memory keyer screen p 4 8 Mener keyer edit screen p 4 9 MEMORY KEYER CG TEST OG TEST DE ICOM ICOM TEST UR SANEM ox 1 3 UA SAN GO BK CFM TU I CFM TU GAZ o GAZ EXIT SET e Memory keyer menu screen MEMORY KEYER MEMORY KEYER MENU l i SEND Max 70 Characters x Ach Count Up Trigger EDIT Memory Editor Present Number 001 001 Style Contest Number CW KEY Memo key Elec key CW Wave Form Set Kaver Repeat Time OH Dot Dash Ratio 1 1 3 0 Rise Time Aria Paddle Polarity Normal Keyer Type ELEC KEY MIC Up Down Keyer OFF
141. LATOR OF THE tents can also be edited from the keyboard IC 7700 J 6 Push F 1 or F 2 to move the cursor back wards or forwards respectively e Pushing F 3 DEL deletes a character and F 4 SPACE inserts a space 7 Repeat steps 5 and to input the desired charac ters Push to set the contents and exit RTTY memory edit screen 4 17 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT RTTY decode set mode i Ez Cc EE com Eee 20 OE 30 O Sq amp Vi Deuel Es o t 0 F 2 O Main dial RTTY decode set mode screen ATTY SET ATTY FFT marte Wavelom Color 0151 m 1153 255 ATTY Decode USO5 ATTY Decode New Line Code ATTY Diddle ATTY TX USOS ATTY Auto CR LF by TX ATTY Time Stamp 7 WIDE RTTY FFT Scope Averaging Select the FFT scope waveform averaging function from 2 to 4 and OFF default OFF RTTY FFT Scope Waveform Color Set the color for the FFT scope waveform e The color is set in RGB format e The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale RTTY Decode USOS Turn the capability of letter code decoding after re ceiving a space USOS UnShift On Space function ON and OFF
142. Manual 2 Auto Send read usage for ANT2 0 OFF 1 TX RX Send read usage for ANT3 0 OFF 1 TX RX Send read usage for ANT4 0 OFF 1 TX RX 2 RX Send read VOX delay 0 0 0 sec to 20 2 0 sec Send read VOX voice delay O OFF 1 Short 2 Mid 3 Long Send read NB depth 0 1 to 9 10 Send read NB width 0 0 to 255 255 Send read DATA mode with filter Send read SSB transmit band width 0 WIDE 1 MID 2 NAR Send read DSP filter shape 0 Sharp 1 Soft Send read roofing filter set 0 3 kHz 1 6 kHz 2 15 kHz Send read manual notch width 0 Wide 1 Mid 2 Nar Send read repeater tone frequen cy see p 14 10 for details Set read TSQL tone frequency see p 14 10 for details Send read the transceiver s condi tion O Rx 1 Tx Send read antenna tuner condi tion O OFF 1 ON 2 Start tuning or while tuning 14 8 To send read memory contents When sending or reading memory contents additional codes must be added to append the memory channel as follows Additional code 0000 0101 0100 P1 0101 P2 Band stacking register To send or read the desired band stacking register s contents combined codes of the frequency band and register codes as follows are used For example when sending reading the oldest con tents in the 21 MHz band the code 0703 is used e Frequency band code Code Other than above Code Registered number 1 latest 3 oldest Codes for
143. ORTANT Formatting erases all saved data in Y the USB Memory Making a backup file on your PC f is recommended 4 SSN 1 During USB Memory set menu display push and hold F 4 FORMAT for 1 sec e Confirmation screen appears 2 Push F 6 FAT or F 7 FAT32 to select the format type FAT or FAT32 respectively e Confirmation screen appears 3 Push F 6 OK to format e Push F 7 CANCEL to cancel 4 Returns to USB Memory set menu indication auto matically r NOTE If no USB Memory is inserted and F 4 FORMAT is selected as in step an error mes 7 sage appears MO MAINTENANCE Section 13 Bo er 13 2 Iransceiver OE EN EE 13 2 ransmit and receive sarissa 13 2 Sosa EE E E ER 13 3 DN ee 13 3 Format USB Memory rrnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnesnsnnene 13 3 W Main dial brake adjustment cccece eee eee eee eee eeeeeeeeeneenens 13 3 E SWR reading serene ects teres Sacer ae dada cae dat SNE 13 4 WE Screen type and font selectionS cece cee cece ence nena eeees 13 4 W Frequency calibration approximate rrrnrannerrnennnernrennvernnr 13 5 E Opening the transceiver S case ceceeceec eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaes 13 6 M Clock backup battery replacement ccceceeeeee eee eee eee eee es 13 6 MI Fuse replacement cece cece cence ence eeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeegeeeegneenaes 13 7 E Resetting the CPU oo cece ccc cece cece eee ee eee e eee
144. OZ2 DAT Eko ae O ES 20 OSA ls Ne OJ ToS 50 o50 EXIT SET SETOLDAT 1 031KB 2007 7 4 11 15 1 091KB 2007 7 11 11 16 491 0MB SET REN DEL SORT SETTING SAVE DAT 1 031KB 2007 7 4 11 15 SETO2 DAT 41 031KB 2007 7 11 11 18 491 018 SPAGE SETTING SAVE 3YUADAT 1 031KB 2007 7 11 15 1 091KB 2007 7 fe a 11 11 16 491 018 SET REN DEL SORT 12 24 The file name saved in the USB Memory can be re named from the transceiver as desired During setting save screen display F 1 DIR FILE to select tree view screen e Push F 2 A or F 3 V to select the desired folder e DECODE SETTING and VOICE folders are avail able as the default e After the folder is selected push and hold F 4 P for 1 sec to display content folder s if available Q Push F 1 DIR FILE to select file list screen 3 Push F 2 A or F 3 V to select the desired file 4 Push F 5 REN DEL momentarily to select the file name edit condition Push ABC MF6 123 MF7 or Symbol MF7 to select the character group then rotate the main dial to select the character e ABC MF6 A to Z capital letters 123 MF7 O to 9 numerals Symbol MF7 amp _ can be selected e Push F 1 41 to move the cursor left push F 2 P to move the cursor right push F 3 DEL
145. PBT controls to the center posi tions push and hold for 1 sec The variable range depends on the passband width and mode The edge of the variable range is half of the passband width and PBT is adjustable in 25 SSB CW RTTY PSK modes or 100 Hz AM mode steps w e TWIN PBT should normally be set to the center posi tions PBT setting is cleared when there is no interfer ence e When PBT is used the audio tone may be changed e Not available for FM mode e While rotating TWIN PBT noise may occur This comes from the DSP unit and does not indicate an equipment malfunction 499 4QQQAA AM Cutting a lower Cutting both higher and passband lower passbands PBT1 NS e Passband Desired signal Interference Desired signal Interference E IF filter selection com 1 l See 200 il oO N NU i OO NN T0000 000 0 90 Oc U S ON SS gt B O ooo ooo oC00 C gt IF filter selection FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE 5 The transceiver has 3 passband width IF filters for each mode For SSB CW and PSK modes the passband width can be set within 50 to 3600 Hz in 50 or 100 Hz steps A total of 41 passband widths are avail
146. PBT indicator above switch lights when PBT is in use e Push and hold for 1 sec to clear the set tings e Manual notch filter p 5 18 Push to turn the manual notch function ON and OFF e Rotate NOTCH control to set the attenuating fre quency e Notch indicator above switch lights when the manual notch is ON e AGC auto gain control p 5 11 Push AGC switch several times to select AGC FAST AGC MID or AGC SLOW gt Push to turn the AGC time constant manual setting ON and OFF Rotate AGC control to adjust the time constant e 14 function p 3 6 gt Push 1 4 to turn the 14 function ON and OFF e Auto tuning function p 5 19 Push AUTOTUNE to turn the auto tuning func tion ON and OFF e The transceiver automatically tunes the desired sig nal within a 500 Hz range IMPORTANT When receiving a weak signal or receiving a signal with interference the automatic tuning function may not tune properly or tune onto an undesired signal Convenient functions for transmit Break in function p 6 3 Push several times to select the break in OFF semi break in and full break in EWN or GEM appears when the semi break in or full break in function is ON respectively 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT About CW reverse mode U C e I z BFO h Interference Desired signal CW R mode USB side KBrO Interference Desired signal CW mode LSB sid
147. Push and hold ATT MF4 for 1 sec to turn the attenuator function OFF e ATT and attenuation level appear when the attenu ator is ON e Noise blanker p 5 16 gt Push to turn the noise blanker ON and OFF and then rotate NB control to adjust the threshold level e Noise blanker indicator above switch lights when the noise blanker is ON e Push and hold NB for 1 sec to enter noise blanker set mode e Noise reduction p 5 17 gt Push to turn the noise reduction ON and OFF e Rotate NR control to adjust the noise reduction level e Noise reduction indicator above switch lights when the noise reduction is ON 1 Push a band key to select the desired band 2 Push to select CW After CW mode is selected push to toggle be tween CW and CW R modes e CW or CW R appears 3 Rotate the main dial to tune a desired signal e Try to match the specified signal s tone to the side tone frequency e The S meter indicates received signal strength when signal is received 4 Rotate AF to set audio to a comfortable listening level 5 Push to transmit e TX indicator lights red 6 Use the electric keyer or paddle to key your CW sig nals e The power meter indicates transmitted CW output power Adjust CW speed with KEY SPEED e Adjustable within 6 48 WPM Push TRANSMIT to return to receive e Twin PBT passband tuning p 5 12 Rotate TWIN PBT controls inner outer e
148. RTTY and RTTY reverse or PSK and PSK reverse mode respectively e Selecting AM FM mode Push to select AM or FM e After AM or FM is selected push to toggle be tween AM and FM e Selecting DATA mode After USB LSB AM or FM is selected push to select USB data LSB data AM data or FM data mode respectively After data mode is selected push to toggle be tween regular voice and data mode After data mode is selected push and hold for 1 sec to select data 1 2 and 3 in sequence BASIC OPERATIONS 3 E Volume setting gt Rotate AF control clockwise to increase counter la eon clockwise to decrease the audio output level e Set a suitable audio level O O SSN KN JER JG AF Audio output increases Audio output decreases E RF gain adjustment com CO EGG Rotate RF control clockwise to increase counter clockwise to decrease the receiver sensitivity
149. S 0 OFF 1 ON Send read RTTY decode new line code O CR LF CR LF 1 CR LF Send read RTTY diddle O OFF 1 Blank 2 LTRS Letter code Send read RTTY TX USOS 0 OFF 1 ON Send read RTTY auto CR LF by TX 0 OFF 1 ON Send read RTTY time stamp set 0 OFF 1 ON Send read clock selection for time stamp 0 Local time 1 CLOCK2 Send read frequency stamp 0 OFF 1 ON Send read received text font color see p 14 10 for details Send read transmitted text font color see p 14 10 for details 14 7 1A 050151 050152 050153 050154 050155 050156 050157 050158 050159 050160 050161 050162 050163 050164 050165 050166 050167 050168 050169 050170 050171 050172 050173 050174 050175 CONTROL COMMAND 14 Send read time stamp text font color see p 14 10 for details Send read text font color in TX buffer see p 14 10 for details Send read FFT scope averaging set for PSK decoder 0 OFF 1 2 2 3 3 4 Send read FFT scope waveform color set for PSK decoder see p 14 10 for details Send read PSK AFC function tun ing range 0 8 Hz 1 15 Hz Send read PSK time stamp set 0 OFF 1 ON Send read clock selection for time stamp 0 Local time 1 CLOCK2 Send read frequency stamp 0 OFF 1 ON Send read received text font color see p 14 10 for details Send read transmitted text font color see p 14 10 for details Send read time stamp text font color
150. S 6 4 S ALX Monitor UNCION EE 6 4 E Monitor UNCON EE vemvemnuetnadwsmutiinranasaneiedeteerensennas 6 4 E Transmit filter width setting SSB only cece cee eee e eee ee eee 6 5 Mi Speech compressor SSB only cccceceeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 6 5 WE Split frequency operation cece eee ece cece eee eee eee eeeeeneeaeeenenaees 6 6 KOM 11600210 1 9 EEE NR 6 7 KNE ae 6 7 vi TABLE OF CONTENTS Section 7 Section 8 Section 9 VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS M About digital voice recorder ccc ccc ece cece eee eeeeeeaeeeeeeeneeanees 7 2 M Recording a received audio c ccc cce cece cence eee ee eeaeeeeeeeeeeas 7 3 Basic recording cece ec cece cece cence eee ee eee eeeaee teens eeateeeneeeeneenanes 7 3 One touch recording seecansyeacteseacendeesrecsbaescesece cage leerecesisetas 7 3 WE Playing the recorded AUIO cece cece cece eee cence eens eneeeeneeanees 7 4 O Basie NNN eder ix 7 4 One touch playing cece cece cece cece eects eee eaeeeaseeaeeeaeeeaeeanes 7 4 WE Protect the recorded contents ccccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeneeaees 7 5 WE Erasing the recorded contents ccecceceeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeaenaees 7 5 M Recording a message for transmit ccc cece cece eee eeeeeeeeeeees 7 6 Recording EEE 7 6 Confirming a message for transmit cceceeeeeseeeeeeeeeaeees 7 6 M Programming a memory name arrarnrennnnennrnn
151. SB SSB data or CW mode 3 Push F 7 SHAPE to select the desired filter shape from soft and sharp 4 Push to exit filter set screen The filter shape can be set for each band HF and 50 MHz bands mode as well as the passband width setting CW only independently from your default set ting in filter shape set mode The type of DSP filter shape for SSB SSB data and CW can be selected independently from soft and sharp Push and hold for 1 sec to enter filter set screen 2 Push and hold F 7 SHAPE for 1 sec to enter filter shape set mode 3 Push F 1 A or F 2 V to select the desired item 4 Rotate the main dial to select the filter shape from soft and sharp 5 Push to exit filter shape set mode SHARP 7 The set filter shape is automatically used only 7 when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider SHARP 7 The set filter shape is automatically used only when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider Filter shape set mode continued CW 500Hz Select the filter shape for CW mode in HF bands CW 600Hz Select the filter shape for CW mode in HF bands 50M SSB 600Hz Select the filter shape for SSB mode in 50 MHz band SSB D 600Hz Select the filter shape for SSB data mode in 50 MHz band CW 500Hz Select the filter shape for CW mode in 50 MHz band CW 600Hz Select the filter shape for CW mode in 50 MHz band 5 15 5 FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE
152. SMIT 4 The contents of the PSK memories can be set using the memory edit menu The memory can store 8 PSK messages for often used PSK information Total capacity of the memory is 70 characters per memory channel Programming contents 1 During PSK mode operation push F 3eDECODE to select PSK decode screen 2 Push F 4 TX MEM to select PSK memory screen then push F 6 EDIT to select PSK memory edit screen e PSK memory contents of the Channel 1 PT1 is se lected 3 Push F 7 PT1 PT8 several times to select the de sired PSK memory channel to be edited 4 Push F 5 4 gt to select the edit item between memory contents and memory name 5 Push ABC MF6 abc MF6 123 MF7 or Sym bol MF7 to select the character group then rotate the main dial to select the character or push the keypad for number input e abc MF6 appears when ABC MF6 is pushed when ABC character group is selected and Symbol MF7 appears when 123 MF7 is pushed when 123 char acter group is selected e Selectable characters with the main dial Key selection Editable characters A to Z capital letters a to z small letters E 0 to 9 numbers IH SNAYP TN 4 a lt gt QUOI d d is for the memory contents set ting only v For your convenience When a PC keyboard is connected to USB con nector on the front panel the PSK memory contents can also be edited from the keyboard
153. Send read FM RX HPF LPF HPF 0 Through 1 100 to 20 2000 LPF 5 500 to 24 2400 25 Through Send read FM RX Tone Bass level 0 5 to 10 5 Send read FM RX Tone Treble level O 5 to 10 5 Send read CW RX HPF LPF HPF 0 Through 1 100 to 20 2000 LPF 5 500 to 24 2400 25 Through Send read RTTY RX HPF LPF HPF 0 Through 1 100 to 20 2000 LPF 5 500 to 24 2400 25 Through Send read PSK RX HPF LPF HPF 0 Through 1 100 to 20 2000 LPF 5 500 to 24 2400 25 Through Send read SSB TX Tone Bass level 0 5 to 10 5 Send read SSB TX Tone Treble level O 5 to 10 5 Send read AM TX Tone Bass level 0 5 to 10 5 Send read AM TX Tone Treble level O 5 to 10 5 Send read FM TX Tone Bass level 0 5 to 10 5 Send read FM TX Tone Treble level 0 5 to 10 5 Send read SSB TX bandwidth for wide see p 14 10 for details Send read SSB TX bandwidth for mid see p 14 10 for details Send read SSB TX bandwidth for narrow see p 14 10 for details Send read speech level 0 0 to 255 1 00 Command table continued 1A 050023 050024 050025 050026 050027 050028 050029 050030 050031 050032 050033 050034 050035 050036 050037 050038 050039 050040 050041 050042 050043 050044 050045 050046 050047 050048 Send read CW side tone gain 0 min to 255 max Send read CW side tone gain limit 0 OFF 1 ON Se
154. UDIO PEAK FILTER TWIN PEAK FILTER SWITCH Push to turn the audio peak filter ON and OFF during CW mode operation p 4 6 FJ appears when audio peak filter is in use Push to turn the twin peak filter ON and OFF dur ing RTTY mode operation p 4 14 Gia appears when twin peak filter is in use During CW mode operation push and hold for 1 sec to select the APF passband width from 320 160 and 80 Hz p 4 6 amp MINI SPECTRUM SCOPE SWITCH p 5 4 Turns the mini spectrum scope screen ON and OFF when pushed e The mini spectrum scope screen can be displayed with another screen such as memory or set mode screen simultaneously Turns the spectrum scope screen ON when pushed and held for 1 sec 1 9 PANEL DESCRIPTION 1 VOICE MEMORY RECORD SWITCH p 7 3 Push to record the received signal for the preset time period e After the preset time has passed stops recording au tomatically Push and hold for 1 sec to record the received signal until the recording is canceled e Push this switch momentarily to stop recording e The memory records the latest 30 sec of audio amp VOICE MEMORY PLAYBACK SWITCH p 7 4 Plays back the previously recorded audio for the preset time period when pushed Plays back all of the previously recorded audio when pushed and held for 1 sec EXIT SET SWITCH Push to exit or return to the previous screen in dication during spectrum sco
155. X Tone AX Tone Side Tone ete Max 0 Characters x Ben TA Memory Built in i f i eh 114 ax 70 Charaptore x den TK Memory b OM ACC ACC IN OUT Signal Levels ete OFF Se 1580 WIDE DISP Style Fant Pop up EXT Display etc TIME Clock vse Se ee vse OTHERS Other items OFF 1 MYCALLx2 3 OSLURSS9 OFF 2 MYCALL 3 4 DE URS99 USB Load Save settings Update firmware Format USB Memory etc MENU HOLD CLR TX MEM WIDE LEVEL ACG DISP TIME OTHERS USB 1 16 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS Section 2 Ho eg EEE EN 2 2 See EEu ed EEE 2 2 WE Rack mounting handle detachment cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 3 WE Selecting a location ciseceesacdetewtsnndnccesdannevexddneddcceecaeescexeseeesens 2 3 E GOU EEE EE ENE 2 4 E Antenna connection REE 2 4 E USB Memory connection caccceseeennicecessdsorceyWunnnesstelonscercinestenesds 2 4 E Required connections ccriniwelresiusnuarcversvanawevasuevainatlairean dehwunnnndns 2 5 O FON DANON EE S 2 5 S RE 0 EEE 2 5 WE Advanced connections encocesetcccewuneccocsovdcusiexetactseucss sasicxecawosia 2 6 FOTS sers renen E E E 2 6 gt Roa panel aat 2 6 TN see 2 7 WE Linear amplifier connections Larssen eee knee 2 8 Connecting the IC PW1 EURO ranrannennennvanvennennvrnvennennvsner 2 8 Connecting a non Icom linear amplifier cccceee eee eee ees 2 8 Mi Transverter jack information cccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeseneeas 2 9 E FSK and AFSK SSTV connecti
156. a 02 Level data 03 Level data 05 Level data 06 Level data 07 Level data 08 Level data 09 Level data OA Level data OB Level data OC Level data OD Level data OE Level data OF Level data 11 Level data 12 Level data 13 Level data 14 Level data 15 Level data 16 Level data 17 Level data Select read attenuator O OFF 1 6 dB 2 12 dB 3 18 dB Select read ANT1 selection 00 RX ANT OFF 01 RX ANT ON Select read ANT2 selection 00 RX ANT OFF 01 RX ANT ON Select read ANT3 selection 00 RX ANT OFF 01 RX ANT ON Select read ANT4 selection 00 RX ANT OFF 01 RX ANT ON Announce with voice synthesizer 00 all data 01 frequency and S meter level 02 receive mode AF level setting 0 max CCW to 255 max CW RF level setting 0 max CCW to 255 11 o clock SQL level setting 0 11 o clock to 255 max CW APF level setting 0 Pitch 550 Hz 128 Pitch 255 Pitch 550 Hz 10 Hz steps NR level setting 0 min to 255 max Inside TWIN PBT setting or IF shift setting 0 max CCW 128 center 255 max CW Outside TWIN PBT setting 0 max CCW 128 center 255 max CW CW PITCH setting 0 300 Hz 128 600 Hz 255 900 Hz 5 Hz steps RF POWER setting 0 max CCW to 255 max CW MIC setting 0 max CCW to 255 max CW KEY SPEED setting 0 max CCW to 255 max CW NOTCH setting 0 low freq to 255 high freq
157. able For RT TY mode the passband width can be set within 50 to 2700 Hz in 50 or 100 Hz steps A total of 32 pass band widths are available For AM mode the passband width can be set within 200 Hz to 10 kHz in 200 Hz steps A total of 50 pass band widths are available For FM mode the passband width is fixed and 3 pass band widths are available Y The filter selection is automatically memorized in U each mode 7 The PBT shift frequencies are automatically memo Y rized in each filter D Select the desired mode 2 Push several times to select the IF filter 1 20r3 e The selected passband width and filter number is dis played in the LCD Filter passband width setting except FM mode Bw 240k SFT O 338 NGOFINA SHARP Ti R ety rt cee EENI 1500 2700 lt ESN Li FIL3 L K ROOFING SHAPE 9 13 Push and hold for 1 sec to enter filter set screen 2 Select any mode except FM e Passband widths for FM modes are fixed and cannot be set 3 Push several times to select the desired IF filter 4 While pushing F 1 BW rotate the main dial to set the desired passband width e In SSB CW and PSK modes the passband width can be set within the following range 50 to 500 Hz 50 Hz steps 600 to 3600 Hz 100 Hz steps e In RTTY mode the passband width can be set within the following range 50 to 500 Hz 50 Hz steps 600 to 2700 Hz 100 Hz steps e In AM mode the passband width can be set within the follow
158. able continued 1A 050124 050125 050126 050127 050128 050129 050130 050131 050132 050133 050134 050135 050136 050137 050138 050139 050140 050141 050142 050143 050144 050145 050146 050147 050148 050149 050150 Send read scope edge frequen cies for 26 00 to 30 00 MHz band see p 14 10 for details Send read scope edge frequen cies for 30 00 to 45 00 MHz band see p 14 10 for details Send read scope edge frequen cies for 45 00 to 60 00 MHz band see p 14 10 for details Send read auto voice monitor set 0 OFF 1 ON Send read voice memory short play time 3 3 sec to 10 10 sec Send read voice memory normal record time 5 5 sec to 15 15 sec Send read contest number style 0 Normal 1 190 ANO 2 190 ANT 3 90 NO 4 90 NT Send read count up trigger chan nel 1 M1 2 M2 3 M3 4 M4 Send read present number 1 9999 Send read CW keyer repeat time 1 1 sec to 60 60 sec Send read CW keyer dot dash ratio 28 1 1 2 8 to 45 1 1 4 5 Send read rise time 0 2 msec 1 4 msec 2 6 msec 3 8 msec Send read paddle polarity 0 Normal 1 Reverse Send read keyer type 0 Straight 1 Bug key 2 ELEC Key Send read mic up down keyer set 0 OFF 1 ON Send read FFT scope averaging set for RTTY decoder 0 OFF 1 2 2 3 3 4 Send read FFT scope waveform color set for RT TY decoder see p 14 10 for details Send read RTTY decode USO
159. above this switch lights green while the function is activated BREAK IN DELAY CONTROL DELAY p 6 3 Adjusts the transmit to receive switching delay time for CW semi break in operations Long delay for PAY slow speed keying Short delay for high speed keying AGC CONTROL AGC p 5 11 Adjusts the continuously variable AGC circuit time constant To use AGC control push AGC VR indi cator lights SQUELCH CONTROL SQL outer control p 3 9 Adjusts the squelch threshold level The squelch mutes noise output from the speaker closed condi tion when no signal is received e The squelch is particularly effective for FM It is also available in other modes e The 11 to 12 o clock position is recommended for the most effective use of the SQL control Deep Noise squelch Squelch threshold tot VE ve N NN ON N Shallow gt Squelch is open I PANEL DESCRIPTION E Front panel continued HF 50MHz TRANSCEIVER IC 7700 MIC O RF PWR KEY SPEED DELAY e e e e PEEL Q DRIVE NOISE REDUCTION LEVEL CONTROL NR inner control p 5 17 Adjusts the DSP noise reduction level when the noise reduction function is in use Set for maximum readability e To use this control push NR NS VE Increases HI Decreases NOISE BLANKER CONTROL NB outer control p 5 1
160. ad FM split offset 9 999 to 9 999 MHz for HF see p 14 10 for details Send read FM split offset 9 999 to 9 999 MHz for 50 MHz see p 14 10 for details Send read split lock set 0 OFF 1 ON Send read tuner auto start set 0 OFF 1 ON Send read PTT tune set 0 OFF 1 ON Send read transverter set 0 OFF 1 ON Send read transverter offset see p 14 10 for details Send read RTTY mark frequency 0 1275 Hz 1 1615 Hz 2 2125 Hz Send read RTTY shift width 0 170 Hz 1 200 Hz 2 425 Hz 14 CONTROL COMMAND Command table continued 050077 Send read RTTY keying polarity 050102 Send read subnet mask 050078 050079 050080 050081 050082 050083 050084 050085 050086 050087 050088 050089 050090 050091 050192 050093 050094 050095 050096 050097 050098 050099 050100 050101 0 Normal 1 Reverse Send read PSK tone frequency 0 1000 Hz 1 1500 Hz 2 2000 Hz Send read speech language 0 English 1 Japanese Send read speech speed 0 Slow 1 Fast Send read S level speech 0 OFF 1 ON Send read speech with a mode switch operation O OFF 1 ON Send read memo pad numbers 0 5 ch 1 10 ch Send read main dial auto TS 0 OFF 1 Low 2 High Send read mic up down speed 0 Low 1 High Send read quick RIT ATX clear function O OFF 1 ON Send read SSB notch operation 0 Auto 1 Manual 2 Auto Manual Send read AM notch operation 0 A
161. ad memory and settings for setup cc MO Ei Fas 2 Save your memory i settings OFF S PDIF MOD Level pe e Bay ven memory ane setting 5 WIDE DATA OFF MOD MICACC Spanie ihe timmere of Gre and LS DATA MOD ACC FORMAT Format the USB Mem ory in FAT FATA2 for IC 7700 vse DATA2 MOD MIC ACC UNMOUNT Unmount the USB Memory to remove sately OFF DATAS MOD MIC 7 WIDE SAVE FIAM UP FORMAT UNMOUNT 12 3 12 SET MODE E Level set mode SSB RX HPF LPF Sets the low pass filter 100 Hz to 2000 Hz and high pass filter 500 Hz to 2400 of the receive audio in 100 Hz steps in SSB mode default OFF Tone Bass Sets the bass level of the receive audio tone in SSB mode from 5 to 5 default 0 Tone Treble Sets the treble level of the receive audio tone in SSB mode from 5 to 5 default 0 AM RX HPF LPF Sets the low pass filter 100 Hz to 2000 Hz and high pass filter 500 Hz to 2400 of the receive audio in 100 Hz steps in AM mode default OFF Tone Bass Sets the bass level of the receive audio tone in AM mode from 5 to 5 default 0 Tone Treble Sets the treble level of the receive audio tone in AM mode from 5 to 5 default 0 FM RX HPF LPF Sets the low pass filter 100 Hz to 2000 Hz and high pass filter 500 Hz to 2400 of the receive audio in 100 Hz steps in FM mode default OFF Tone Bass Sets the bass level of the receive audio tone in FM mode from 5
162. al height of 1 8 m The figures assume the worst case emission of con stant carrier For the bands 10 MHz and higher the following power density limits have been recommended 10 144 MHz 2 W sq m EIRP clearance heights by frequency band 1 Watts 2 1m 10 Watts 2 8 m 25 Watts 3 4 m 100 Watts 5m 1000 Watts 12m ABOUT CE Forward clearance EIRP by frequency band 100 Watts 2 m 1000 Watts 6 5 m 10 000 Watts 20m 100 000 Watts 65m In all cases any possible risk depends on the transmit ter being activated for long periods actual recom mendation limits are specified as an average during 6 minutes Normally the transmitter is not active for long periods of time Some radio licenses will require that a timer circuit automatically cuts the transmitter after 1 2 minutes etc Similarly some types of emission i e SSB CW AM etc have a lower average output power and the as sessed risk is even lower CE Versions of the IC 7700 which display the CE symbol on the serial number seal comply with the essential requirements of the European Radio and Telecommunication Terminal Directive 1999 5 EC This warning symbol indicates that this equipment operates in non harmonised fre quency bands and or may be subject to li censing conditions in the country of use Be sure to check that you have the correct ver sion of this radio or the correct programming of this radio to comply with national licens ing requirement
163. al times to select FM mode 3 Push and hold TONE MF6 for 1 sec to enter tone frequency screen 4 Push F 1 A or F 2 W to check the repeater tone frequency or tone squelch frequency respectively 5 Push F 6 T SCAN to start the tone scan e SCAN blinks while scanning 6 When the tone frequency is detected the tone scan pauses e The tone frequency is set temporarily on a memory channel Program the memory channel to store the tone frequency permanently e The decoded tone frequency is used for the repeater tone frequency or tone squelch frequency 7 To stop the scan push F 6 T SCAN e Push and hold F 4 DEF for 1 sec to select the default frequency 8 Push EXIT SET to exit tone frequency screen ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION Section 10 M Antenna connection and selection cccceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeneeas 10 2 M Antenna memory settings anrnnnvunnennnvunnnnnvnnnnennennnnennennner 10 3 Antenna type selection uarrnnnrnnvnnnvnnnvennvennvennennnennnenuneen 10 3 NTN ee 10 4 Antenna selection mode ccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeanenes 10 4 Receive antenna I O setting c cece ccc eec cece eeeeeaeeaeeaeenaes 10 5 M Antenna tuner operation rarannvnnnvvnnennnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnennunennnenner 10 6 Tuner operation susviscmeissseucndnckcuectataemdeaicedec cece naaeees ned 10 6 If the tuner cannot tune the antenna _ 2 eeeeeee eee 10 7
164. annels Blank channel e1 x2 and X3 show that the channel is specified as the select memory This scan operates in memory mode e Scan speed Scan speed can be selected from 2 levels high or low in scan set mode See p 9 3 for details e Squelch condition PROGRAMMED SCAN MEMORY SCAN Scan pauses on each channel when the scan resume is ON not applicable when OFF The scan continues until it is stopped manually and does not pause even if it detects signals SQUELCH OPEN Scan stops when detecting a signal If you set scan resume ON in set mode the scan pauses for 10 sec when detecting a signal then resumes When a signal disap pears while scan is paused scan resumes 2 sec later SQUELCH CLOSED E Voice squelch control function COM GB a e 260 900 Ee com ER EGGEN 20 200 e Mc Scan Speed Select the desired scan speed from high and low Scan Resume Set the scan resume fu
165. another edge 7 frequency 1 800 2 000 MHz Set the frequencies within 1 600 to 2 000 MHz range in 1 kHz steps 3 500 4 000 MHz Set the frequencies within 2 000 to 6 000 MHz range in 1 kHz steps 7 Up to 500 kHz band width can be specified so either edge frequency will be set to the difference between higher and lower frequencies from 5 to Y 500 kHz automatically while setting another edge 77 frequency 7 000 7 300 MHz Set the frequencies within 6 000 to 8 000 MHz range in 1 kHz steps 7 Up to 500 kHz band width can be specified so either edge frequency will be set to the difference between higher and lower frequencies from 5 to 500 kHz automatically while setting another edge frequency Scope set mode continued 8 00 11 00 Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode scope when the 8 to 11 MHz band is selected 11 00 15 00 Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode scope when the 11 to 15 MHz band is selected 15 00 20 00 Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode scope when the 15 to 20 MHz band is selected 20 00 22 00 Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode scope when the 20 to 22 MHz band is selected 22 00 26 00 Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode scope when the 22 to 26 MHz band is selected 9 7 5 FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE 10 100 10 150 MHz e Set the frequencies within 8 000 to 11 000 MHz range in 1 kHz steps 7 Up t
166. ant e VSC voice squelch control p 9 3 Push VSC MF7 to turn the VSC function ON and OFF e The VSC indicator appears when the voice squelch function is set to ON Convenient functions for transmit e Speech compressor p 6 5 gt Push COMP MF6 to turn the speech compres sor ON and OFF e Push and hold COMP MF6 for 1 sec to select the compression bandwidth from wide middle and nar row e VOX voice operated transmit p 6 2 Push to turn the VOX function ON and OFF MOA appears when the VOX function is ON 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT Transmit quality monitor p 6 4 Push to turn the monitor function ON and OFF e Rotate MONI GAIN to adjust the monitor gain e Monitor indicator above switch lights when the monitor function is ON e Audio tone control p 12 5 Push F 7 SET then F 1 LEVEL to enter level set mode Select an item with F 1 AJ F 2 V then rotate the main dial to adjust the audio tone About 5 MHz band operation USA version only IC 7700 Tuning FCC Channel Frequency Center Frequency 5 33050 MHz 5 33200 MHz 5 34650 MHz 5 34800 MHz 5 36650 MHz 5 36800 MHz 9 37150 MHz 9 37300 MHz 5 40350 MHz 5 40500 MHz To assist you in operating the 5 MHz band within the rules specified by the FCG transmission is illegal on any 5 MHz band frequency other than the five fre quencies indicated in the table above 4 3 Operation on the 5 MHz band i
167. antenna memory setting Loads and sets the reference signal setting Use the original reference signal setting Loads and sets the IP address and subnet mask setting Use the original IP address and subnet mask setting Loads and sets the CI V address setting Use the original CI V address setting Loads and sets memory channel contents and other settings Use the original memory channel contents and other settings Loads and sets voice TX message Use the original voice TX message Loads and sets voice RX message Use the original voice RX message 12 SET MODE E File saving Memory channel contents set mode settings etc can be saved into the USB Memory for backup 1 During set mode menu screen indication push F 7 USB to select USB Memory set menu screen 2 Push F 2 SAVE to select setting save screen Siu 3 Change the following conditions if desired File name 1 Push F 4 EDIT to select file name edit con 2 dition e Push F 1 DIR FILE several times to select the file name if necessary Push ABC MF6 123 MF7 or Symbol MF7 to select the character group then ro tate the main dial to select the character e ABC MF6 A to Z capital letters 123
168. as 7 10 7 1 7 E About digital voice recorder VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS The IC 7700 has digital voice memories up to 4 mes sages for transmit and up to 20 messages for receive A maximum message length of 30 sec can be recorded into receive memory total message length for all channels of up to 209 sec and a total message length of up to 99 sec can be recorded in transmit memory The transmit memory is very convenient for repeated CQ and exchange transmissions in contests as well as when making consecutive calls to DXpeditions MN Select any mode EE gt 0 2 Push F 2 VOICE to display voice recorder screen G Push to display voice recorder menu gt 4 Push F 1 PLAY or F 2 MIC REC to select the de 5 sired memory channel screen then record audio or pa E playback the contents as described below o oc OS O G Push twice to exit voice recorder screen e Example When REC is pushed and held for 1sec Push and hold for 1 sec Push momentarily Push and hold for 1 sec Push momentarily starts recording stops recording starts recording stops recording mn MLL N 20 sec 30 sec Push momentarily within 30 s
169. ate the main dial to select the character e Push ABC MF6 or abc MF6 to toggle capital and small letters e Push 123 MF7 or Symbol MF7 to toggle numerals and symbols e Push F 1 4 or F 2 P for cursor movement e Push F 3 DEL to delete the selected character e Push F 4 SPACE to input a space e Pushing the transceiver s keypad 0 9 can also enter numerals Push to set the name 12 SET MODE E Others set mode Calibration Marker This item is used for a simple frequency check of the transceiver default OFF See p 13 5 for calibration procedure 7 NOTE Turn the calibration marker OFF after Y checking the frequency of the transceiver Beep Confirmation A beep sounds each time a switch is pushed to con firm it This function can be turned OFF for silent op eration default ON The beep output level can be set in level set mode p 12 6 Beep Band Edge A beep sounds when an operating frequency enters or exits an amateur band This functions independent of the confirmation beep setting above default ON The beep output level can be set in level set mode p 12 6 Beep Sound Sets the desired key touch beep sound frequency within 500 to 2000 Hz in 10 Hz steps default 1000 Hz Quick SPLIT When this item is set to ON pushing and holding for 1 sec sets the unselected VFO s readout frequency to the selected VFO s readout frequency and activates split op
170. ated in the TX buffer screen 3 Press F12 of the connected keyboard to transmit the typewritten contents e The color of displayed text in the TX buffer screen will be changed when transmitted e To cancel the transmission press F12 twice 4 Press F12 of the keyboard to return to receive 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT Convenient functions for receive e Preamp p 5 9 Push P AMP MF3 several times to set the pre amp OFF preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON e P AMP1 or P AMP2 appears when the preamp 1 or preamp 2 is ON e Attenuator p 5 9 gt Push ATT MF4 several times to set the attenu ator in 6 dB steps e Push and hold ATT MF4 for 1 sec to turn the atten uator function OFF e ATT and attenuation level appear when the attenu ator is ON e Noise blanker p 5 16 Push to turn the noise blanker ON and OFF and then rotate NB control to adjust the threshold level e Noise blanker indicator above switch lights when the noise blanker is ON e Push and hold for 1 sec to enter noise blanker set mode e Twin PBT passband tuning p 5 12 Rotate TWIN PBT controls inner outer e PBT indicator above switch lights when PBT is in use e Push and hold for 1 sec to clear the set tings About RTTY reverse mode Normal Reverse I I 170 Hz 2125Hz 1 2125 Hz 170 Hz Space Mark BFO BFO Space Mark Twin peak filter E com O ESTES 20
171. ble for the operating frequency e The antenna is not properly tuned e Push and hold TUNER for 1 sec to manually tune the antenna e The attenuator is activated e Push ATT MF4 several times to select ATT OFF Received audio is unclear Wrong operating mode is selected e Select a suitable operating mode or distorted e PBT function is activated e Push and hold PBT CLR for 1 sec to reset the function e Noise blanker is turned ON when receiving a Push NB to turn the noise blanker OFF strong signal e Preamp is activated e Push P AMP MF3 once or twice to turn the function OFF e The noise reduction is activated and the NR Set the NR control for maximum readability control is too far clockwise The ANT switch does not e The antenna switch has not been activated Set the antenna switch in set mode to Auto or p 10 4 function Manual Transmitting is impossible The operating frequency is not inside a ham Set the frequency to be in a ham band band Output power is too low RF PWR is set too far counterclockwise e Rotate RF PWR clockwise e DRIVE is set too far counterclockwise e Set DRIVE to a suitable position e MIC is set too far counterclockwise e Set MIC to a suitable position e The antenna for another band is selected e Select an antenna suitable for the operating p 10 2 frequency e The antenna is not properly tuned e Push and hold TUNER for 1 se
172. break in 2 full break in Send read manual notch setting 0 OFF 1 ON Send read VSC setting 0 OFF 1 ON Send read Manual AGC setting 0 OFF 1 ON Send read DIGI SEL setting 0 OFF 1 ON Send read twin peak filter setting 0 OFF 1 ON Send read dial lock function set ting 0 OFF 1 ON Send read RX antenna connector setting 0 OFF 1 ON 19 Read the transceiver ID 00 1 00 Send read memory contents see p 14 9 for details 01 Send read band stacking register contents see p 14 9 for details 02 Send read memory keyer con tents see p 14 9 for details 14 4 14 15 16 19 A 050001 050002 050003 050004 050005 050006 050007 050008 050009 050010 050011 050012 050013 050014 050015 050016 050017 050018 050019 050020 050021 050022 Send read the selected filter width SSB CW PSK 0 50 Hz to 40 3600 Hz RTTY 0 50 Hz to 31 2700 Hz AM 0 200 Hz to 49 10 kHz Send read the selected AGC time constant O OFF 1 0 1 0 3 sec to 13 6 0 8 0 sec Send read SSB RX HPF LPF HPF 0 Through 1 100 to 20 2000 LPF 5 500 to 24 2400 25 Through Send read SSB RX Tone Bass level 0 5 to 10 5 Send read SSB RX Tone Treble level 0 5 to 10 5 Send read AM RX HPF LPF HPF 0 Through 1 100 to 20 2000 LPF 5 500 to 24 2400 25 Through Send read AM RX Tone Bass level 0 5 to 10 5 Send read AM RX Tone Treble level O 5 to 10 5
173. c to manually p 10 6 tune the antenna No contact possible with RIT or ATX function is activated e Push RIT or ATX to turn the function OFF another station e Split frequency function is activated e Push SPLIT to turn the function OFF Transmit signal is unclear MIC is set too far clockwise e Set MIC to a suitable position p 3 12 or distorted Repeater cannot be e Split frequency function is not activated e Push SPLIT to to turn the function ON accessed e Programmed subaudible tone frequency is Reset the frequency using set mode wrong 13 2 MAINTENANCE 13 Scanning PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION Programmed scan does Squelch is open e Set SQL to the threshold point not stop Programmed scan does The same frequencies have been programmed Program different frequencies in scan edge p 8 3 not start in scan edge memory channels P1 and P2 memory channel P1 and P2 Memory scan does not 2 or more memory channels have not been Program more than 2 memory channels start programmed Select memory scan does 2 or more memory channels have not been Designate more than 2 memory channels as p 9 7 not start designated as select channels select channels for the scan Display PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION RER The displayed frequency The dial lock function is activated e Push LOCK to turn the function OFF does not change properly A set mod
174. ch can simulate a key paddle Preset in the keyer set mode p 4 12 PTT SWITCH Push and hold to transmit release to receive PTT LOCK SWITCH available for SM 20 only Push to toggle between transmit and receive INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS 2 E Accessory connector information ACC1 PIN No NAME DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATIONS High level More than 2 4 V 1 RTTY Controls RTTY keying Low level Less than 0 6 V Output current Less than 2 mA 2 GND Connects to ground Connected in parallel with ACC 2 pin 2 Ground level 0 5 V to 0 8 V Input output pin SEND Goes to ground when transmitting Output current EERE TA When grounded transmits Input current Tx Less than 200 mA Connected in parallel with ACC 2 pin 3 Q 5 MOD Modulator input Input impedance 10kQ WM 37 Connects to a modulator Input level Approx 100 mV rms PG ATP 2 ld ise fee Te g p Output level 100 300 mV rms in default settings see notes below SQLS Squelch output SQL open Less than 0 3 V 5 mA Goes to ground when squelch opens SQL closed More than 6 0 V 100 uA Output current Max 1A KE ae OUI a Connected in parallel with ACC 2 pin 7 Control voltage 4 V to 0 V ALC ALG voltage input Input impedance More than 10 kO Connected in parallel with ACC 2 pin 5 ACC2 PIN No NAME DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATIONS Output voltage 8 V 40 3 V Ke Output current Less than 10 mA Same as ACC 1 pin 2 SEND Same a
175. ctable characters using the main dial Key selection Editable characters A to Z capital letters E 0 to 9 numbers NOTE ig used to transmit a following word with no space such as AR Put before a text string such as AR and the string AR is sent with no space r x is used to insert the CW contest serial num ber The serial number automatically increments by 1 This function is only available for one mem ory keyer channel at a time Memory keyer chan 7 nel M2 used by default NLY For your convenience When a PC keyboard is connected to USB con nector on the front panel the memory keyer con tents can also be edited from the keyboard Push 4 or gt to move the cursor backwards or forwards respectively e Pushing deletes a character and inserts a space 6 Repeat steps and to input the desired charac ters 7 Push EXIT SET twice to return normal screen 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT Contest number set mode EI com DI EGG 200 11000 000 00 e Contest e set mode screen Main dial Number Style Count Up Trigger Fresent Number Number Style This item sets the numbering system used for contest serial numbers normal or short morse numbers Count Up Trigger
176. cted frequency etc S e Push and hold for 1 sec to additionally an nounce the selected mode Q gt osx Pushing a mode switch also announces the ap z S o SSS SS O propriate mode p 12 15 SPEECH 7 The output level of the voice synthesizer can be Z adjusted in level set mode p 12 6 3 BASIC OPERATIONS E Basic transmit operation Transmitting TX indicator S B 6 0 66 66 o GO RF PWR com oe am EEE 50 EG l O 0 s6982 O 7 o 30 O FIloo L oO O i T YY Microphone gain adjustment ET com Lo EE 26 EE Go o9 O O 11000 000 00 J _ O omn lt ALC zone 3 12 Before transmitting moni
177. cts external equipment that supports S P DIF input output ALC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT POT ALC ADJ Adjusts the ALC levels No adjustment is required when the ALC output level of a connected non Icom linear amplifier is 0 to 4 V a DC ALC INPUT JACK ALC p 2 8 Connects to the ALC output jack of a non Icom lin ear amplifier T R CONTROL JACK RELAY p 2 8 Connects to ground when transmitting to control an external unit such as a non Icom linear amplifier NOTE T R control voltage and current must be lower than 16 V DC 0 5 A or 250 V AC 200 mA with MOSFET switching ACCESSORY SOCKET 1 ACC 1 ACCESSORY SOCKET 2 ACC 2 Enable connection of external equipment such as a linear amplifier an automatic antenna selector tuner a TNC for data communications etc e See p 2 11 for socket information EXTERNAL SPEAKER JACK EXT SP p 2 6 Connects an external speaker 4 8 Q if desired EXTERNAL KEYPAD JACK EXT KEYPAD p 2 7 Connects an external keypad for direct voice mem ory or electronic keyer control Transceiver mute control line both transmit and re ceive is also supported METER JACK METER p 2 7 Outputs a signal showing received signal strength transmit output power VSWR ALC speech com pression VD or ID level for external meter indication DC OUTPUT JACK DC OUT p 2 7 Outputs a regulated 14 V DC approx for external equipment Connected in parallel with 13
178. dating from the PO sed ascossacntesnnsenaesecceuesnetanen tdenthed eeaaneess 16 8 PANEL DESCRIPTION Section I Me 011600 gt EE ERE NN RS 1 2 E Roar 0 NE NER 1 12 ELOD OSAV ee ee eee eee eee eee eee ere ee 1 14 E Screen menu arrangement I PANEL DESCRIPTION E Front panel POWER SWITCH p 3 2 Turn the internal power supply ON in first The in ternal power supply switch is located on the rear panel p 3 2 Push to turn the transceiver power ON e The POWER indicator above this switch lights green when powered ON Push and hold for 1 sec to turn the transceiver power OFF e The POWER indicator lights orange when the trans ceiver is OFF when the internal power supply is switched ON TRANSMIT SWITCH Selects transmit or receive The TX indicator lights red while transmitting and the RX indicator lights green when the squelch is open ANTENNA TUNER SWITCH p 10 6 Turns the internal antenna tuner ON and OFF bypass when pushed momentarily e The TUNER indicator above this switch lights green when the tuner is turned ON goes off when tuner is turned OFF bypassed Tunes the antenna tuner manually when pushed and held for 1 sec e The TUNER indicator blinks red during manual tun ing e When the tuner cannot tune the antenna the tuning circuit is bypassed automatically after 20 sec MONI GAIN VOX GAIN ANTI VOX CONTRAST BRIGHT 1 2 Downloaded by
179. ddress ee 7 WARNING NEVER turn the IC 7700 power ZY OFF at this stage 7 The transceiver firmware will be corrupted X O Connecting to the IC 7700 Connected to the IC 7700 Transfer in progress Transfer successful Start update Please wait a while resents Click OK to finish the firmware update are e The FIRMWARE UPDATING dialog as above disap Firmware up dating for the main CPU is completed Turn the IC 7700 power OFF then ON again with POWER switch pears i After turning the power ON the IC 7700 will work with the updated firmware AD Push POWER to tu rn the IC 7700 power OFF then D E Pre E will start automatically depending on the updated contents O N ag al n i DO NOT turn the IC 7700 power OFF until the normal operational screen appears Click OK to finish the firmware update 2 Depending on the update one or two dialog boxes Please wait for 10sec Please wait for 25sec as at left appear on the IC 7700 display in se quence WARNING NEVER turn power OFF WARNING NEVER turn power OFF A AWARNING NEVER turn the IC 7700 power f OFF at this stage 7 The transceiver firmware will be corrupted 3 After the dialog disappears the firmware update is completed and normal operation screen appears 16 9 INSTALLATION NOTES For amateur base station installations it is recom mended that the clearance in front of the antenna array is calculated relative to the EIRP Eff
180. decimal code The IC 7700 s address is 74h When 2 or more IC 7700 s are connected to an op tional CT 17 Cl V LEVEL CONVERTER rotate the main dial to select a different address for each IC 7700 the range is 01h to 7Fh CI V Transceive Transceive operation is possible with the IC 7700 connected to other Icom HF transceivers or receivers When ON is selected changing the frequency op erating mode etc on the IC 7700 automatically changes those of connected transceivers or re ceivers and vice versa 12 17 12 SET MODE OFF e ON Pushing one of external keypad switches transmits the desired voice message contents during a phone mode operation e OFF External keypad does not function default OFF e ON Pushing one of external keypad switches transmits the desired keyer memory contents during CW mode operation e OFF External keypad does not function default 12 SET MODE HM Others set mode continued RS 232C Function Select RS 232C connector output data format from Cl V and Decode Decode Baud Rate Selects data transmission speed Baud rate when Decode is selected in RS 232C Function above settings are 300 1200 4800 9600 and 19200 bps default 9600 Keyboard Type Selects the connected keyboard type from Japanese English United Kingdom French French Canadian German Portuguese Portuguese Brazilian Span ish Spanish Latin American and I
181. dication can be selected in display set mode pgs 3 11 12 10 Q Push to close the RTTY decode screen Adjust the RT TY decoder threshold level if some char acters are displayed when no signal is received 1 Select the RTTY decode screen as described above 2 Push F 5 ADJ to select the threshold level setting condition 3 Rotate the main dial to adjust the RTTY decoder threshold level e Push and hold F 6 DEF for 1 sec to select the default setting 4 Push F 5 ADJ to exit from the threshold level set ting condition The UnShift On Space USOS function and new line code can be set in the RITY set mode p 4 18 NNN 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT RTTY memory transmission MYGALL 2 MYGALLA3 S GSLURS99 DE UR599 AT2 karse a a ag ra og prs EN 50 ES 30 OD v r O p AT EN DE ICOM ICOM K DE ICOM ICOM ICOM K GEL UA 599 5909 BK OSL DE ICOM ICOM UR 599 599 BK AT3 ATA GE com SS Saari GI Er TJ QSLUAS99 TA DE LA599
182. dio output level even when the received signal strength varies dramatically Select FAST for tuning and then select MID or SLOW depending on the receiving condition MF6 MULTI FUNCTION 6 SWITCH COMP Turns the speech compressor ON and OFF in SSB mode p 6 5 Switches the narrow middle or wide compression when pushed and held for 1 sec OFF WIDE v What is the speech compressor The speech compressor compresses the transmitter audio input to increase the average audio output level to increase talk power This function is effective for long dis tance communication or when propagation conditions are poor Turns the 14 speed tuning function ON and OFF in SSB data CW RTTY and PSK modes p 3 6 e 1 4 function sets dial rotation to 14 of nor mal speed for fine tuning 1 4 Le Switches between the tone encoder tone squelch function and no tone op eration when pushed in FM mode pgs 4 33 4 34 Enters the tone set mode when pushed and held for 1 sec in FM mode pgs 4 33 4 34 TONE OFF MF7 MULTI FUNCTION 7 SWITCH VSC OFF Switches the voice squelch control function ON and OFF useful for scan ning p 9 3 1 7 PANEL DESCRIPTION 1 LCD FUNCTION SWITCHES F 1 F 7 Push to select the function indicated in the LCD dis play above these switches e Functions vary depending on the operating condition amp TRANSMIT INDICATOR TX Lights red
183. e GI About CW pitch control feom EES COEF de o oo SEES CW PITCH CW side tone function jom G EisSe 20 GE 2009 oe SSN E ae EN 5 66 om MONI GAIN DD CO 0 DO DO DO 2 O 0000 000 00 4 5 CW R CW Reverse mode uses the opposite side band to receive CW signals Use when interfering signals are near a desired signal and you want to use CW R to reduce the interference During CW mode push to select CW and CW R mode The received CW audio pitch and CW side tone can be adjusted to suit your preference from 300 to 900 Hz in 5 Hz steps This does not change the oper ating frequency Rotate CW PITCH to suit your preference e Adjustable within 300 to 900 Hz in 5 Hz steps When the transceiver is in receive and the break in function is OFF p 6 3 you can listen to the CW side tone without actually transmitting This allows you to
184. e UTC PSK decode set mode continued PSK Time Stamp Frequency Selects the operating frequency display for time stamp usage NOTE The frequency won t be displayed when OFF is selected in PSK Time Stamp as below left PSK Font Color Receive Set the text color for received characters e The color is set in RGB format e The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale PSK Font Color Transmit Set the text color for transmitted characters e The color is set in RGB format e The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale PSK Font Color Time Stamp Set the text color for time stamp indication e The color is set in RGB format e The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale PSK Font Color TX Buffer Set the text color in the TX buffer screen e The color is set in RGB format e The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale 4 27 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT OFF ON _ Displays the operating frequency e OFF No operating frequency display MP en 255 mm 128 e Push F 3 lt 4 gt to select R Red G Green and B Blue and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255 MO mn OG ml 106 e Push F 3 gt to select R Red G Green and B Blue and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255 Mmm mmni55 msn 189 e Push F 3 lt 4 gt to select R Red G Green and B Blue and then r
185. e in FM mode from 5 to 5 default 0 Tone Treble Sets the treble level of the transmit audio tone in FM mode from to 5 default 0 12 5 SET MODE 12 12 SET MODE E Level set mode continued SSB TBW WIDE Sets the transmission passband width to wide setting by changing the lower and higher cut off frequencies SSB TBW MID Sets the transmission passband width to middle set ting by changing the lower and higher cut off frequen cies SSB TBW NAR Sets the transmission passband width to narrow set ting by changing the lower and higher cut off frequen cies Speech Level Sets the voice synthesizer audio output level from 0 to 100 in 1 steps default 50 Side Tone Level Sets the side tone output level from 0 to 100 in 1 steps default 50 Side Tone Level Limit Turns the side tone output level limiting capability from ON and OFF default ON Beep Level Sets the key touch beep output level from 0 to 100 in 1 steps default 50 Beep Level Limit Turns the key touch beep output level limiting capa bility from ON and OFF default ON Phones Level Ratio Sets the ratio for audio output level from the head phone toward to the internal speaker within a range of 0 60 to 1 40 in 0 01 steps default 1 00 12 6 100 2900 Lower freq 100 default 200 300 and 500 Hz Higher freq 2500 2700 2800 and 2900 Hz default 300 2700 Lower freq 1
186. e scan speed de creases but scan does not stop 7 Push F 1 PROG or F 2 AF to stop the scan push F 3 FINE to cancel the fine scan e Rotating the main dial also cancels the scan 8 Push and hold F 6 RECALL for 1 sec to recall the frequency that is set before starting the scan if de sired SCANS E Memory scan pa se SQL G Ich USB a 39390 ANT 1 VFO A 14 206 om SCAN TIE Recall Select No 1 men MHZ SELECT 4F SPAN SEL No RECALL SET E Select memory scan operation 1 Ich USB FIL2 1 VFO a 14 w a gt SELECT MEMORY SCAN 5 Recall Select No 1 _ ane MHZ SELECT 4F SPAN SEL No RECALL SET 9 6 Push several times to close a multi func tion screen if necessary 2 Select memory mode 3 Push F 5 SCAN to select the scan screen 4 Set SQL open or closed e See page 9 2 for squelch condition Push F 1 MEMO to start the memory
187. e screen is selected e Push EXIT SET several times to exit the set p 12 2 mode screen e The internal CPU has malfunctioned e Reset the CPU Format USB Memory PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF 0 Format error appears The inserted USB Memory capacity is smaller Insert a USB Memory larger than 64 MB or p 12 26 when formatting in FAT32 than 64 MB select the FAT format Format error appears The inserted USB Memory capacity is larger Insert a USB Memory smaller than 2 GB or p 12 26 when formatting in FAT than 2 GB select the FAT32 format E Main dial brake adjustment The tension of the main dial may be adjusted to suit your preference The brake adjustment is located on the bottom side of MAIN DIAL the front panel See the figure at left Slide the brake adjustment to a comfortable tension level while turning the dial continuously and evenly in one direction Brake ZL djustment 2 g Light men Fag gt D Heavy 13 3 13 MAINTENANCE E SWR reading ry 44 52V VD E Screen type and font selections e Screen image example Display Type B Display Font Slim x1 1ch o FIL2 14 195 000 VFO A 14 050 00
188. e set between 0 1 to 8 0 sec 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 depends on mode or turned OFF e Push and hold F 4 DEF for 1 sec to select a default value 9 Select another non FM mode Repeat steps to if desired Push to exit the AGC set mode screen 5 FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE E Twin PBT operation TWIN PBT _ USB OO 6 14 100 000 1 mmm Filter set screen BW 1 70k SET 5 700 1500 1 e PBT operation example Both controls at center position PBT1 IF center frequency PBT2 558 AeGOFING 5 FiL1 Ok Ge zak LAK ROOFING Interference PBT Passband Tuning electronically narrows the IF passband width by shifting the IF frequency slightly outside of the IF filter passband to reject interference The IC 7700 uses DSP for the PBT function Moving both TWIN PBT controls to the same position shifts the IF for both high and low frequencies The LCD shows the passband width and shift fre quency graphically PBT indicator above switch lights when PBT IS IN USE Push and hold for 1 sec to enter the filter set screen Current passband width and shift fre quency is displayed in the filter set screen To set the TWIN
189. ec after These contents Push rec momentarily after passing 30 pushing and holding for 1 sec records won t be recorded sec from pushing and holding frec rec for the all contents 1 sec records the 30 sec before can celing the record e Example When REC is pushed momentarily Push momentarily Push momentarily starts recording starts recording NOTE The contents will be recorded into an independent memory channels automatically lt M gt lt gt 15 sec 3 sec lt When is pushed momentarily again within 15 sec default from the last rec operation all the contents between Push Rec momentarily re operations will be recorded cords the contents of the previous 15 sec The recording time period can be changed with Normal Rec Time in voice set mode p 7 9 e Playing back the all contents in a channel e Playing back the end of 5 sec in a channel Push HAY tari US E2 momentarily Or push and hold for 1 sec Push momentarily GEER 30 sec max Not playing back Play back 5 sec default The playing back time period can be changed with Short Play Time in voice set mode p 7 9 7 2 E Recording a received audio Basic recording
190. ect antenna type set screen 3 Push F 1 A or F 2 V to select the desired an tenna 4 Rotate the main dial to select the desired antenna condition from TX RX RX ANT4 only and OFF TX RX Select when an antenna is connected e OFF Select when no antenna is connected e RX Select when a receive only antenna is connected available for the ANT4 only 6 Push to exit antenna type set screen v For your information The OFF antennas cannot be selected with ANT MF1 switch operation or with the antenna memory setting When RX is selected for ANT4 1 R 2 R and 3 R selections will be added for the selection for both ANT MF1 switch operation and the antenna memory setting In these selections the antenna connected to ANT1 ANT2 and or ANT3 will be used for trans mission and the antenna connected to ANT4 will be used for reception 10 ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION E Antenna memory settings continued Temporary memory BW 500 SFT o CW FIL2 10 120 00 i 1 14 195 00 USB ANT ANT MEMORY 15 00 x indicators appear when a different antenna from the original is selected Push F 4 TEMP M to turn the temporary memory ON and OFF Antenna selection mode ANT 2 METER P P AMP OFF ATT OFF Acc MID 1 4 OFF VSC OFF AXx lO BW 500 SFT o cw FIL2 hi BPF LANT Switeh Auto ANT TYPE ANT1 RXTX ANTS AXITK ANTA
191. ective Isotropic Radiated Power The clearance height below the an tenna array can be determined in most cases from the RF power at the antenna input terminals Different exposure limits have been recommended for different frequencies a relative table shows a guide line for installation considerations Below 30 MHz the recommended limits are specified in terms of V m or A m fields as they are likely to fall within the near field region Similarly the antennas may be physically short in terms of electrical length and that the installation will require some antenna matching device which can create local high intensity magnetic fields Analysis of such installations is best considered in association with published guidance notes such as the FCC OET Bulletin 65 Edition 97 01 and its annexes relative to amateur transmitter instal lations The EC recommended limits are almost identi cal to the FCC specified uncontrolled limits and tables exist that show pre calculated safe distances for differ ent antenna types for different frequency bands Fur ther information can be found at http www arrl org e Typical amateur radio installation Exposure distance assumes that the predominant ra diation pattern is forward and that radiation downward is at unity gain side lobe suppression is equal to main lobe gain This is true of almost every gain antenna today Exposed persons are assumed to be beneath the antenna array and have a typic
192. ed p 12 15 Memo pads are convenient when you want to memo rize a frequency and operating mode temporarily such as when you find a DX station in a pile up or when a desired station is busy for a long time and you want to temporarily search for other stations Use the transceiver s memo pads instead of relying on hastily scribbled notes that are easily misplaced Writing frequencies and operating modes into memo pads VFO A E i FIL2 y Erased In this example 21 276 MHz USB will be erased when 7 067 MHz LSB is written Calling up a frequency from a memo pad MEMO PADS 8 You can store the readout frequency and operating mode by pushing MP W When you store a 6th frequency and operating mode the oldest stored frequency and operating mode are automatically erased to make room for the new set tings Y Each memo pad must have its own unique combi f nation of frequency and operating mode memo 7 pads having identical settings cannot be written NYSS You can call up the desired frequency and operating mode of a memo pad by pushing several times e Both VFO and memory modes can be used e The frequency and operating mode are called up starting from the most recently written When you call up a frequency and an operating mode from memo pads with MP R the previously dis played frequency and operating mode are automati cally stored in a temporary pad The frequency and op erating
193. ee p 2 2 for main dial attachment details TABLE OF CONTENTS Section 1 PANEL DESCRIPTION ME Front panel 0 0 ccc ccc ccc c cece eee eeeeee esses eeeeeseeeesaeesgenesgnensgneeas 1 2 E Gal panal NE RE rarai 1 12 ME LCD display c ccc ccc ccc cece cece ence eee eeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeaas 1 14 E Screen menu arrangement cccce cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeaeesaeeeeeeaes 1 16 Section2 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS E DACKO EN 2 2 WE Main dial ueea eee SE 2 2 M Rack mounting handle detachment asavannvannvrnnvvnnrennvnnnenneennr 2 3 M Selecting a location rsrannannenavannennenanennennnannennennnsnnennesanene 2 3 Ba eienen E ce a tree eens 2 ng ae ae evecare aes edeeneet 2 4 WE Antenna connection seeders keen menagebe 2 4 E USB Memory connection c cccccceceeceeeceeceeceeeseeceeceescees 2 4 WE Required connections sanden eden denweneses 2 5 FOT E cnet siescancain E E E E E E 2 5 Rear panel soscssrieriraenane duneni iaiia otebeeweureas 2 5 WE Advanced connections a cencdenceousacabedseanaveqsedarecseessieenmseaacsenenee 2 6 O Font panal ad 2 6 PANNEN dr 2 6 Rear panel 2 ee 2 7 E Linear amplifier connections c cece ccc e eee eeeeeeeseeeeeneeseneeas 2 8 Connecting the IC PW1 EURO _ cece ccc cce eee eeeeeeeeeeeeneees 2 8 Connecting a non Icom linear amplifier cccceeeeeeeeee ees 2 8 Mi Transverter jack information ccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeese
194. ee pce anse E E E A E E A T A T 9 2 BP NN eda 9 2 WE Voice squelch control function rranvunnrannvannennnvnnnrnnvenenennenene 9 3 E Scan set mode re 9 3 E Programmed scan operation ccandsucicencesivnencerverstesshiwivelnedeenees 9 4 EAF NN vr 9 4 E Fine programmed scan Fine AF Scan uunnnnnnennnennnernnennrernnennn 9 5 E Memory scan operation Lansunns sedaner deed 9 6 M Select memory scan operation 2 kee eee eceec eee eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaes 9 6 vil TABLE OF CONTENTS E Setting select memory channels cceceeseeee eee eeeeeaeeeeenaees 9 7 O Seting M scan rer 9 7 Setting in memory list screen 0 kee cece cece eee e ee eeae eae eaeeeaeeas 9 7 Erasing the select scan setting ccc cece cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 7 Heg EEE ENE 9 8 Section 10 ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION M Antenna connection and Selection arrnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrrnnnnnennr 10 2 M Antenna memory settings anavanneunnernnennnennvnnnnnnnennnnennnenner 10 3 Antenna type selection uarrnunrunvnnnvnnnvennvennvennnnnnennneneneen 10 3 O Tomporaly MEMOTY ENE NN 10 4 Antenna selection mode ranrunnannennnnnvennennvannennennnsnnennennse 10 4 Receive antenna I O setting rarrrnrnarannennvarrnnennvrnrennnnnne 10 5 E Antenna tuner operation si ciceicincivensstionssecessawsanevnrnaaeennoetsa regan 10 6 9 luner operation sseriressiarssrrnnnnorn innr aR KANANEN EE EARNER EENEN 10 6 If the tuner cannot t
195. eeseneeas 2 9 E FSK and AFSK SSTV connections ccc cece cece eee eeeeeeeeaees 2 9 M Microphone connector information cece ecee cece eee eeeeeeeees 2 10 W Microphones options esicsiacedcnsmatesinnssdnesaesenpesatemseauesemecentanvxet 2 10 ON eT E see E E EA 2 10 SG ee 2 10 M Accessory connector information ananennnnnnnnnnnnvennnnennvnnrnnenn 2 11 Section 3 BASIC OPERATIONS E When first applying power CPU resetting rrrrnnennnnnnennennnnnr 3 2 Te VEE 0 EEE EE AEE EENEN 3 2 E Selecting VFO memory mode sencscwcecevescvecuctvanecvecdeedevensewentees lt 3 3 Br NNN Geer 3 3 Selecting VFO A VFO B arrranannannnannenvennennnannennnsnnennennnsnne 3 3 VFO equalization ere 3 3 M Selecting an operating band c 00ccceeceeeceeceeseeeseeceecneseess 3 4 Using the band stacking registers ruanrunvanannnnvnnnvennennneenneen 3 4 Mee ee Selling EE nn Err iNe RAN dEr iD EERRAEKENANS 3 5 Tuning with the main dial suasarssermrmameidsvsmademsvensen 35 Direct frequency entry with the keypad ruarrunvannvennernnvenneen 3 5 Quick UNING SIED 4 3 6 Selecting KHZ ee 3 6 1 4 tuning step function ssesssnsenesssrrnnnrrrrrrrrrrressrsrrrrrnne 3 6 PSTN re 3 7 Auto tuning step function aent ane snek bengenanded 3 7 Band edge warning beep rrnnrrnnenannnnnnnnnennnennnenanennnennnennne 3 7 E Operating mode selection rrarrnnannraavanrennnannenr
196. elect an item with F 1 A F 2 then rotate the main dial to adjust the audio tone 1 Push a band key to select the desired band 2 Push to select LSB or USB e USB or LSB appears e Below 10 MHz LSB is automatically selected above 10 MHz USB is automatically selected 3 Rotate the main dial to tune a desired signal e The S meter indicates received signal strength when a signal is received 4 Rotate AF to set audio to a comfortable listening level Push or PTT microphone to transmit e TX indicator lights red 6 Speak into the microphone at your normal voice level e Adjust the microphone gain with MIC at this step if necessary 7 Push or release PTT microphone to return to receive e Noise reduction p 5 17 gt Push to turn the noise reduction ON and OFF e Rotate NR control to adjust the noise reduction level e Noise reduction indicator above switch lights when the noise reduction is ON e Notch filter p 5 18 Push to turn the auto or manual notch function ON and OFF e Rotate NOTCH control to set the valley frequency for manual notch operation e Notch indicator above switch lights when either the auto or manual notch is ON e AGC auto gain control p 5 11 gt Push AGC MF5 switch several times to select AGC FAST AGC MID or AGC SLOW Push to turn the AGC time constant manual setting ON and OFF e Rotate AGC control to adjust the time const
197. enansnnennnnnnenn 3 8 E VOMMCSCHING sivenuencnerdosstatanecinaecncdivens ae iennateareneneersacunnes 3 9 E RF NNN ener 3 9 W Squelch level adjustment lt c lt cc lt ceesccecsecensceseecdeeeceesecceeseess 3 9 TABLE OF CONTENTS W Meter indication selection rranennnnnnnnnannnennnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnner 3 10 Multi function digital meter cccecce cece eeeeeeeeeeeseeeesneeas 3 10 Meter type selection rnnnnannnnnnnnennnnnnnnnannnennnnennnnnnnnnnnner 3 11 M Voice synthesizer Operation cece cece cece e cece eeeeeeeeeeeeseesaees 3 11 WE Basic transmit operation cc cece ene cece cease eeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeneeeans 3 12 TESTE E EE E A asececin E 3 12 Microphone gain adjustment cccece cece cease eee eeee eee eaees 3 12 Drive gain adjustment c daceccescecehsetescesscedencee eskere 3 13 Section 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT BTA vr 4 2 Convenient functions for receive srrnrrrrrrrnnrrrnnnrrrenne 4 2 Convenient functions for transmit ccc cece eee e cess eeeeeaees 4 3 About 5 MHz band operation USA version only 0508 4 3 E Operating CW EE 4 4 Convenient functions for receive cece cece cece e cette tees eeaeees 4 4 Convenient functions for transmit ccc ce eee cece cess eeeeeaees 4 5 About CW reverse mode arrnunnanannnnnnannennnannennennnennennesnnene 4 5 SAVN er 4 5 GW side tone funct
198. enna The attenuator prevents a desired signal from distor tion when very strong signals are near the desired fre quency or when very strong electromagnetic fields such as from broadcasting stations near your location gt Push ATT MF4 several times to set the attenuator 6 dB 12 dB 18 dB or attenuator OFF Push and hold ATT MF4 for 1 sec to turn the at tenuator function OFF ATT 6 dB 6dB attenuation 12dB attenuation 18dB attenuation FI 5 FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE E RIT function RIT ATX ao ol AG 7 OO00000 eS E Oo oo00500 ss RIT monitor function EI com EEE GI 50 Oo SEN O O g E Ole XFC The RIT Receive Increment Tuning function com pensates for off frequency operation of the received Station The function shifts the receive frequency up to 9 99 kHz in 10 Hz steps without moving the transmit frequency Push to turn the RIT function ON and OFF Sim and the
199. er ON and OFF and then rotate NB control to adjust the threshold level e Noise blanker indicator above switch lights when the noise blanker is ON e Push and hold for 1 sec to enter noise blanker set mode e Noise reduction p 5 17 gt Push to turn the noise reduction ON and OFF e Rotate NR control to adjust the noise reduction level e Noise reduction indicator above switch lights when the noise reduction is ON About BPSK and QPSK modes EE fcom O Sea GI oO O OOOO 000 000 00 lt MENU1 gt B QPSK DECODE F2 Es PSK decode screen BPSK mode _ DECODE BPSK BFO 14 058 500 ori tor mwt Tv 1500 AGC wet PSE Eni dr gg de Wo MID PSKS1 BPSK Keyboard rx sh ane TX supper ted 1 4 Max 72 Characters x Gch TX hemor ry built in hig Data Saving to U58 Memor ry Suppor ted OFF 50 THRESHOLD F 1 MYGALL Z 2 MYGALLx3 SET VSC OFF MENU 2 gt PSK decode screen QPSK mode AGC MID B GPSK PSK DECODE aak PSK a Decode Monitor Kok PEKA APEK ORSK Keyboard TX or Memory TX supported Max 70 Characters p Beh TX Menor ry built in Data Saving to USB Memory supp ed w BFO 14 096 500 18 00 1 4 OFF B50 7
200. eration default ON 1000Hz ON See p 6 7 for details 12 12 HM Others set mode continued FM SPLIT Offset HF Sets the offset difference between transmit and re ceive frequencies for the quick split function This set ting is used for HF bands in FM mode only and is used to input the repeater offset for an HF band The offset frequency can be set from 9 999 MHz to 9 999 MHz in 1 kHz steps default 0 100 MHz FM SPLIT Offset 50M Sets the offset difference between transmit and re ceive frequencies for the quick split function This set ting is used for 50 MHz band FM mode only and is used to input the repeater offset for the 50 MHz band The offset frequency can be set from 9 999 MHz to 9 999 MHz in 1 kHz steps default 0 500 MHz SPLIT LOCK When this item is ON the main dial can be used to adjust the transmit frequency while pushing XFC even while the lock function is activated default OFF See pgs 6 6 6 7 for split frequency operation details Tuner Auto Start The internal antenna tuner has an automatic start ca pability which starts tuning if the SWR is higher than 1 5 3 1 Tuner PTT Start Tuning of the internal antenna tuner can be started automatically at the moment the PTT is pushed after the operating frequency is changed more than 1 from last tuned frequency default OFF 12 13 12 SET MODE 0 100MHz 0 500MHz OFF e OFF The tu
201. essage to controller Command table mo Send frequency data Same as Send mode data command 06 02 Pead band edge frequencies DE EE JReadoperatingmode Bet operating frequency _ Select LSB Select USB Select AM Select CW Select RTTY Select FM Select CW R Select RTTY R Select PSK Select PSK R Select VFO mode Select VFO A Select VFO B Equalize VFO A and VFO B BO Exchange VFO A and VFO B Select memory mode 0001 0101 Select memory channel P1 0100 P2 0101 S wite gt erer Scan stop Programmed memory scan start Programmed scan start AF scan start Fine programmed scan start Fine AF scan start Memory scan start Select memory scan start Set AF scan span A1 5 kHz A2 10 kHz A3 20 kHz A4 50 kHz A5 100 kHz A6 500 kHz A7 1 MHz Set as non select channel Set as select channel 1 1 2 2 3 3 when no data command is specified the previously set number or 1 is selected Set the number for select memory scan 0 ALL 1 1 2 2 3 3 Set scan resume OFF Set scan resume ON Turn the split function OFF Turn the split function ON Select 10 Hz 1 Hz tuning step Select 100 Hz tuning step Select 1 kHz tuning step Select 5 kHz tuning step Select 9 kHz tuning step Select 10 kHz tuning step Select 12 5 kHz tuning step Select 20 kHz tuning step Select 25 kHz tuning step CONTROL COMMAND 14 00 RX ANT 01 RX ANT 02 RX ANT 03 RX ANT 01 Level dat
202. ewise 1 Bar Send read peak hold set for Bar meter O OFF 1 ON 14 5 050049 050050 050051 050052 050053 050054 050055 050056 050057 050058 050059 050060 050061 050062 050063 050064 050065 050066 050067 050068 050069 050070 050071 050072 050073 050074 050075 050076 CONTROL COMMAND 14 Send read memory name indica tion setting 0 OFF 1 ON Send read audio peak filter width pop up indication setting 0 OFF 1 ON Send read manual notch width pop up indication setting 0 OFF 1 ON Send read screen saver set 0 OFF 1 15 min 2 30 min 3 60 min Set read screen saver type 0 Bound 1 Rotation 2 Twist Send read output signal setting for external display 0 OFF 1 ON Send read synchronous pulse level setting 0 L 1 H Send read opening message indi cation 0 OFF 1 ON Send read opening message con tents see p 14 9 for details Send read date 20000101 1st Jan 2000 to 20991231 31st Dec 2099 Send read time 0000 00 00 to 2359 23 59 Send read CLOCK2 function 0 OFF 1 ON Send read offset time for CLOCK2 240001 24 00 to 240000 24 00 Send read CLOCK2 name up to 3 character see p 14 9 Send read calibration marker 0 OFF 1 ON Send read confirmation beep 0 OFF 1 ON Send read band edge beep 0 OFF 1 ON Send read beep audio frequency 50 500 Hz to 200 2000 Hz Send read quick split set 0 OFF 1 ON Send re
203. ghs approx 22 5 kg 50 Ib Always have two people available to carry lift or turn over the transceiver A CAUTION The line voltage receptacle must be near the transceiver and must be easily accessible Avoid extension cords DO NOT use chemical agents such as benzine or al cohol when cleaning the IC 7700 as they can damage the transceiver s surfaces DO NOT push the PTT switch when you don t actu ally desire to transmit AVOID using or storing the transceiver in areas with temperatures below 0 C 32 F or above 50 C 122 F AVOID placing the transceiver in excessively dusty en vironments or in direct sunlight AVOID placing the transceiver against walls or putting anything on top of the transceiver This may overheat the transceiver Always place unit in a secure place to avoid inadver tent use by children BE CAREFUL If you use a linear amplifier set the transceiver s RF output power to less than the linear amplifiers maximum input level otherwise the linear amplifier will be damaged Use Icom microphones only supplied or optional Other manufacturers microphones have different pin assignments and connection to the IC 7700 may dam age the transceiver or microphone The LCD display may have cosmetic imperfections that appear as small dark or light spots This is not a mal function or defect but a normal characteristic of LCD displays During maritime mobile operation keep the transceiver a
204. h F 5 SCAN to select the scan screen Set SQL open or closed e See page 9 2 for squelch condition 6 Push F 1 PROG to start the programmed scan Gere Uikxe we and decimal points blink while scanning 7 When the scan detects a signal scan stops pauses or ignores it depending on the resume setting and the squelch condition 8 To cancel the scan push F 1 PROG e Rotating the main dial also cancels the scan 9 Push and hold F 6 RECALL for 1 sec to recall the frequency that is set before starting the scan if de sired 7 If the same frequencies are programmed into the 77 scan edge memory channel P1 and P2 pro 7 grammed scan will not start Push several times to close a multi func tion screen if necessary 2 Select VFO mode or a memory channel 3 Select the desired operating mode e The operating mode can also be changed while scan ning 4 Push F 5 SCAN to select the scan screen Set the main band s SQL open or closed e See page 9 2 for squelch condition Set the AF span by pushing F 4 4F SPAN e 5 kHz 10 kHz 20 kHz 50 kHz 100 kHz 500 kHz and 1000 kHz are selectable 7 Set center frequency of the AF span Push F 2 AF to start the AF scan WANA and decimal points blink while scanning 9 When the scan detects a signal the scan stops pauses or ignores it depending on the resume set ting and the squelch condition 0 To cancel the scan
205. he USB connector MY USB Memory USB keyboard or USB hub is not supplied by Icom E Required connections Front panel A straight or bug key can be used when the internal electronic keyer is turned OFF in keyer set mode p 4 12 Optional Use the heaviest gauge wire or strap available and make the connection as short as possible 0 0 0 Grounding prevents elec o trical shocks TVI and oth er problems INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS HF 50MHz TRAN SCEIVER IC 7700 MIC O RF PWR e e 7 ER JAAN 0 hi N A IS 2 S iS e DIE X g a NN YI G Antenna 1 2 3 4 p 2 4 CC KEY SPEED DELAY e e GS Aa lr bik SN Ki AR e DI Eg SI e AN G y O 0Q e e DRIVE COMP AC outlet A WARNING Use the supplied AC power cable Example ANT1 for 1 8 18 MHz bands ANT 2 for 21 28 MHz bandg ANTS for 50 MHz band ANT 4 for receive antenna NOTE Attach the sup plied antenna connec tor cap when no anten na or external equip ment is connected 2 5 00000000000001 JOYNINTN UNN o EXT SP 1 RELAY Gaye OP 2 2 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS E Advanced connections Front panel USB Memory Headphones Keyboard Connects an USB type PC key board directly for RTTY PSK31 op eration as well as other text edit op erations
206. he internal tuner may not be able to tune in AM mode In such cases push and hold for 1 sec to manually tune e MANUAL TUNING During SSB operation at low voice levels the internal tuner may not be tuned correctly In such cases man ual tuning is helpful Push and hold for 1 sec to start manual tuning e A side tone is emitted and TUNER switch indicator blinks red while tuning e If the tuner cannot reduce the SWR to less than 1 5 1 after 20 sec of tuning the TUNER switch indicator goes out e AUTOMATIC TUNER START HF bands only If you want to deactivate the tuner under conditions of VSWR 1 5 1 or less use the auto tuner start function and turn the tuner OFF This function activates the tuner automatically when the SWR exceeds 1 5 1 This function is turned ON in set mode p 12 13 10 6 E Antenna tuner operation continued e PTT TUNER START e Antenna tuner of the IC PW1 If the tuner cannot tune the antenna 10 7 ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION 10 The tuner is always tuned when the PTT is pushed after the frequency is changed more than 1 from last tuned frequency This function removes the push and hold TUNER operation and activates for the first transmission on a new frequency This function is turned ON in set mode p 12 13 When using an external antenna tuner such as the IC PW 1 s tuner tune with the external antenna tuner and turn OFF the IC 7700 s tuner After tuning is co
207. he transmission e AUTO TX Automatically transmits the se lected memory To return to re ceive press F12 on the key board e AUTO RX Press F12 on the keyboard to transmit the selected memory Au tomatically returns to receive after the transmission Press F12 on the keyboard to transmit the selected memory and press F12 again to return to re ceive 6 Push to exit RTTY memory edit condition e No indication Y NOTE The transceiver always functions in the Z AUTO TX RX setting when no keyboard is con f nected RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4 Editing RTTY memory The contents of the RT TY memories can be set using the memory edit menu The memory can store and re transmit 8 RTTY message for often used RTTY infor mation Total capacity of the memory is 70 characters per memory channel Programming contents EKTE During RTTY mode operation push F 3eDECODE to select RTTY decode screen Push F 4 TX MEM to select RTTY memory screen then push F 6 EDIT to select RTTY mem ory edit screen e RTTY memory contents of the Channel 1 RT1 is se lected 3 Push F 7 RT1 RT8 to several times to select the desired RTTY memory channel to be edited 4 Push F 5 4 gt to select the edit item between memory contents and memory name
208. his reduces intermodulation distortion from the nearby strong signals The automatic pre selector tracks the frequency tun ing changing it s resonant frequency in discrete steps Push to turn the digital selector ON and OFF e DIGI SEL indicator above this switch lights green 2 Rotate DIGI SEL control to adjust the center fre quency 7 NOTE e When rotating the main dial while the digital selec tor is activated mechanical noise may be heard due to the switching noise from internal relays e The preamp P AMP1 or P AMP2 cannot be used while the digital selector is activated MMA FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE 5 E Autotune function The Automatic tuning function tunes the displayed fre quency max CW 500 Hz AM 5 kHz automatically when an off frequency signal is received This function is active while in CW or AM mode is selected Push AUTOTUNE to toggle the autotune function E ZE ON or OFF TUANE blinks when autotune function is activate O i e After 30 sec has passed the autotune function stops O j ez tuning automatically even it s still off frequency O SSS eS B 00000060 on O VFO A
209. ile receiving X VERTER connector can be acti gt 09609 H vated as an input terminal from an external transverter When 2 to 13 8 V is applied to pin 6 of ACC 2 the X VERTER connector is activated for transverter oper ation and the antenna connectors do not receive or transmit any signals 9 While transmitting the X VERTER connector outputs signals of the displayed frequency at 20 dBm 22 mV as signals for the external transverter Transverter connector E FSK and AFSK SSTV connections To connect a TNC or scan converter etc refer to the diagram below FSK operation when connecting to ACC 1 e When using a PC application RTTY _ __ _ RTTY OUTPUT Connect to serial port parallel port speaker jack microphone aN der en jack and line IN OUT jack etc Eg AF meer INPUT See the instruction manual of the pr nO a SEND T application for details Rear panel view e When using a TNC TNC or scan converter RTTY RTTY OUTPUT GND GND bh ao INPUT PTT Rear panel view AFSK operation e When connecting to ACC 1 e When using a PC application E Audio output Connect to serial port parallel GND port speaker jack microphone l jack and line IN OUT jack etc AF input See the instruction manual of 2 PTT
210. ily to reset the ATX frequency when the quick RIT ATX clear function is ON p 12 15 4 To cancel the ATX function push again Wind disappears When the ATX function is ON pushing and holding XFC allows you to monitor the operating frequency directly ATX is temporarily cancelled v For your convenience Calculate function The shift frequency of the ATX function can be added subtracted to the displayed frequency While displaying the ATX shift frequency push and hold for 1 sec The monitor function allows you to monitor your trans mit IF signals in any mode Use this to check voice characteristics while adjusting SSB transmit parame ter p 12 5 The CW sidetone functions regardless of the switch setting Push to switch the monitor function ON and OFF e MONITOR indicator above this switch lights green 2 Rotate MONI GAIN for the clearest audio output while pushing PTT and speaking into the micro phone 7 NOTE When using the VOX voice delay turn the 7 monitor function OFF or transmitted audio will be 77 echoed SSN FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT 6 E Transmit filter width setting SSB only The transmit filter width for SSB mode can be selected from wide middle and narrow During USB or LSB mode selection push and hold COMP MF6 for 1 sec several times to select the desired transmit filter width from wide middle and narrow e The filter can be independently set on the speech
211. in with MIC at this step if necessary e FM narrow transmission is available when FIL2 or FIL3 is selected 7 Push or release PTT microphone to return to receive Attenuator p 5 9 Push ATT MF4 several times to set the attenu ator in 6 dB steps e Push and hold ATT MF4 for 1 sec to turn the atten uator function OFF e ATT and attenuation level appear when the attenu ator is ON e Audio tone control p 12 4 Push F 7 SET then F 1 LEVEL to enter level set mode Select an item with F 1 Al F 2 V then rotate the main dial to adjust the audio tone e Audio tone control p 12 5 Push F 7 SET then F 1 LEVEL to enter level set mode Select an item with F 1 Al F 2 V then rotate the main dial to adjust the audio tone 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT E Repeater operation SPLIT indicator Band keys ANT 1 METER 6 Po TONE P AMP VFO A FM FIL1 29 650 00 SPLIT 1 ATT OFF 4 32 A repeater amplifies received signals and retransmits them at a different frequency When using a repeater the transmit frequency is shifted from the receive fre quency by an offset frequency A repeater can be ac cessed using split frequency operation with the shift
212. inal amplifier MOSFETs Outputs the drain current of the final am plifier MOSFETs External Meter Level ami 50 Sets the output level for an external meter indication e Approx 2 5 V at 50 default setting for full scale indica with in 0 to 100 range in 1 steps tion 4 7 kQ impedance 12 8 E ACC set mode continued REF IN OUT Selects the transceiver s reference signal condition from IN OFF and OUT REF Adjust Adjusts the internal reference signal frequency within 0 to 100 range in 1 steps during frequency cali bration E Display set mode LCD Unit Bright Adjusts the LCD unit brightness from 0 dark to 100 bright range in 1 steps default 50 Backlight Switches Adjusts the switch indicators brightness from 1 dark to 100 bright range in 1 steps default 80 Display Type Selects the desired display type from A Black back and B Blue back default A Display Font Selects the desired font for frequency readout from Basic 1 Basic 2 Italic Round and Slim default Basic 1 129 12 SET MODE Use an external reference signal for the IC 7700 Turn the transceiver power OFF then ON to make the setting effective Not input output the reference signal default Outputs the IC 7700 reference signal to ex ternally connected equipment s for their ref erence 7 NOTE If the applied reference signal is off fre 7 quency or no signal is applied with
213. ing range 200 Hz to 10 kHz 200 Hz steps e Push and hold F 4 DEF for 1 sec to select the default value 5 Repeat steps to if desired for other modes 6 Push to exit filter set screen 7 The PBT shift frequencies are cleared when the 7 passband width is changed 7 This filter set screen graphically displays the PBT 77 shift frequencies and CW pitch operations NY 5s FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE Roofing filter selection BW 240k SFT OF SoH ASCFING CHANP FIL 3 0 k 7 f aea zak cee FILI LA R ROOFING SHAPE DSP filter shape ROOFING SHAPE Filter shape set mode 398 0 600Hz cw S DHz cw IGONE T HF SSB 600Hz Select the filter shape for SSB mode in HF bands SSB D 600Hz Select the filter shape for SSB data mode in HF bands The IC 7700 has 3 6 and 15 kHz roofing filters at the 1st IF frequency The roofing filter provides interfer ence reduction from nearby strong signals Push and hold for 1 sec to enter filter set screen 2 Select any mode except FM 3 Push F 6 ROOFING to select the desired filter width from 15 kHz default 6 KHZ and 3 kHz e Push and hold F 4 DEF for 1 sec to select a default value 4 Push to exit filter set screen The type of DSP filter shape for each SSB SSB data and CW can be selected independently from soft and sharp Push and hold for 1 sec to enter filter set screen 2 Select S
214. ion secenvcius sendcacncewacaGedaiseaptivedeeaiwedensmceees 4 5 APF Audio Peak Filter operation cc cece eceeee esses eee eeeens 4 6 M Electronic keyer functions 0 cece ccc eeceeeeceeeeeeeeaeeesseeeeneeas 4 7 Memory keyer screen ivsiconscaenceaesanveneeasensicandt caumeeaweeedsaenanaes 4 8 Editing a memory keyer Le redde 4 9 Contest number set mode arrnanannnnnnannennannnannennenanennennnenr 4 10 Keyer set mode runnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnennnennnennnennnsnnne 4 11 E Operating RTTY FSK ee 4 13 Convenient functions for receive rrarrrrnraanenannanveravenavennnr 4 14 About RTTY reverse mode rrrnrrnnennnnnnnennnnnnvennnennnennnsnnne 4 14 Twin peak filter re 4 14 Functions for the RTTY decoder indication cceeeeeeeees 4 15 Setting the decoder threshold level rarrranaanannnnnvanvennnnnnenr 4 15 RTTY SE Ge SS 4 16 Automatic transmission reception setting ccccceeeeeeeenees 4 16 Editing RITO MEMO Te 4 17 RTTY decode set mode unne eee 4 18 DaT SAVING nekte 4 20 E Operating PSK secreted icacnnye eecrtne se eeeneunareeaossuedeeendaedesecaneeees 4 21 Convenient functions for receive oo eee cece eee e eee eeeeeeeeeeeenas 4 22 About BPSK and QPSK modes ccc ccc ec cece ee eeeeeeeeeeneenes 4 22 Functions for the PSK decoder indication ceeee eee ees 4 23 Setting the decoder thresh
215. ion ON and OFF Max Hold Turn the peak level holding function ON and OFF CENTER Type Display Select the center frequency of the spectrum scope indication center mode only Waveform Color Current Set the waveform color for the currently received sig nals Waveform Color Max Hold Set the waveform color for the receiving signals max imum level Sweep Speed 2 5k Select the sweep speed for the 2 5 kHz span selec tion from SLOW MID and FAST Select the sweep speed for the 5 kHz span selec tion from SLOW MID and FAST 10k Select the sweep speed for the 10 kHz span selec tion from SLOW MID and FAST 9 5 5 FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE ON 7 NOTE The transmitting signal waveform indica tion is available for the center mode only Filter Center e Filter center Shows the selected filter s center frequency at the center e Carrier Point Center Shows the selected operating mode carrier point frequency at the center e Carrier Point Center Abs Freq In addition to the carrier point center setting above the actual frequency is displayed for the bottom of the scope e The color is set in RGB format e Push F 3 gt to select R Red G Green and B Blue and rotate the ratio from 0 to 255 range e The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale HE mn e102 mn e The color is set in RGB format e Push F 3 gt to select R Red G Green and
216. ion screen if necessary 4 Push F 7 SET to select set mode menu screen 5 Push F 7 USB to select USB Memory set menu 6 Push and hold F 3 FIRM UP for 1 sec 7 Read the displayed precaution carefully e Push F 1 A or F 2 V to scroll the indication e Push F 7 CANGEL to cancel the firmware updating After you read and understand all of the precau tions push F 6 OK e F 6 OK appears only following the precautions e Push F 7 CANCEL to cancel the firmware updating 9 Push F 2 4 or F 3 V to select the firmware file then push F 4 FIRM UP Read the displayed precautions carefully If you agree push and hold F 6 OK for 1 sec to start the firmware update e Push F 7 CANGEL to cancel the firmware updating 2 While loading the firmware from the USB Memory the dialog as at left is displayed USB FIL2 alee wal Please wait After this dialog disappears reboot the IC 7700 gg p Finmsare updating for the mai 7 CPL Completed MID 3 USE FIL2 A A on Moon Moon VE om e SHUTDOWN xxx 1 Please wait USB MEMOR LOAD SAVE FIRM UP FORMAT UNMOUNT Load memory and settings for setup Save your memory and settings Update the firmware of CPUs and DSPs Format the USB Memory in FAT FAT32 for IC 7700 Unmount the USB Memory to remove safely FIRM UP FORMAT UNMOUNT Please wait for 10sec WARNING NEVER turn power OFF Please wait for 25sec WARNING NEVER
217. l e Noise reduction indicator above switch lights when the noise reduction is ON e Audio tone control p 12 4 Push F 7 SET then F 1 LEVEL to enter level set mode Select an item with F 1 A F 2 V then rotate the main dial to adjust the audio tone 4 29 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 1 Push a band key to select the desired band 2 Push to select AM e AM indicator appears After AM mode is selected push to toggle be tween AM and FM modes 3 Rotate the main dial to tune to the desired fre quency e The S meter indicates received signal strength when signal is received 4 Rotate AF to set audio to a comfortable listening level Push or PTT microphone to transmit e The TX indicator lights red 6 Speak into the microphone at your normal voice level e Adjust the microphone gain with MIC at this step if necessary 7 Push or release PTT microphone to return to receive e Twin PBT passband tuning p 5 12 Rotate TWIN PBT controls inner outer e PBT indicator above switch lights when PBT is in use e Push and hold for 1 sec to clear the set tings e Notch filter p 5 18 Push to turn the manual notch function ON and OFF e Rotate NOTCH control to set the attenuating fre quency e Notch indicator above switch lights when either the auto or manual notch is ON e AGC auto gain control p 5 11 Push AGC switch several times to select AGC FAST
218. l speed when the 14 tuning function is ON for finer tuning control Push 1 4 MF6 to toggle the 14 tuning function ON and OFF W appears when the 1 tuning function is ON Selecting 1 Hz step W 3 1 a P AMP VFO A OSEN FIL2 3 14 100 000 OFF 1 14 100 00 USB 1Hz step indicator Auto tuning step function ET fcom 3 GE S O O Ne AGC MID 000 000 00 PSK Tone Frequency SPEECH Language SPEECH Speed SPEECH Level SPEECH MODE Switch Memopad Numbers MAIN DIAL Auto TS MIC Up Down Speed T Band edge warning beep AGE MID Calibration Marker Beep Confirmation Beep Band Coe Beep Sound Quick SPLIT FM SPLIT OlfsetiHF FM SPLIT Olfset S0M SPLIT LOCK T 3 7 3 BASIC OPERATIONS A minimum tuning step of 1 Hz can be used for fine tuning 1 Push TS to turn the quick tuning function OFF 2 Push and hold TS for 1 sec to turn the 1 Hz tuning step ON and OFF When rotating the main dial rapidly the tuning speed accelerates automatically as selected GO Push several times to close a multi func tion screen if necessary 2 Push F 7 SET to select set mode me
219. lt All e Select Saves the selected contents only This setting is fixed YES Saves memory channel contents and set tings of set modes Selects the voice TX message save condition from e VES Saves the voice TX message YES and NO default YES NO Does not save Selects the voice RX message save condition from e YES Saves the voice RX message YES and NO default NO eNO Does not save 12 20 Load option set mode Load Contents Selects file load condition from All and Select default Select ANT Memory Selects the antenna memory setting loading condition YES and NO default NO REF IN OUT REF Adjust Selects the reference signal setting load condition YES and NO default NO IP Address Subnet Mask Selects the IP address and subnet mask setting load condition YES and NO default NO CI V Address Selects the CI V address setting load condition YES and NO default NO Other Memory amp Settings Selects memory channel contents and other settings load condition YES and NO default YES Voice TX Memory Selects the voice TX message load condition YES and NO default YES Voice RX Memory Selects the voice RX message load condition YES and NO default NO 12 21 12 SET MODE Select All Loads and sets the all following contents e Select Loads and sets the selected contents only Loads and sets the antenna memory Use the original
220. m pleted turn the internal tuner ON Otherwise both tuners tune simultaneously and correct tuning may not be obtained See the instruction manual included with each antenna tuner for their respective operations Check the following and try again e the ANT connector selection e the antenna connection and feedline e the untuned antenna SWR Less than 3 1 for HF bands Less than 2 5 1 for 50 MHz band e the transmit power 8 W for HF bands 15 W for 50 MHz band e the power source voltage capacity If the tuner cannot reduce the SWR to less than 1 5 1 after checking the above perform the following e repeat manual tuning several times e tune with a 50 Q dummy load and re tune the antenna e turn power OFF and ON e adjust the antenna feedline length This is effective for higher frequencies in some cases e Some antennas especially for low bands have a narrow bandwidth These antennas may not be tuned at the edge of their bandwidth therefore tune such an antenna as fol lows Example Suppose you have an antenna which has an SWR of 1 5 1 at 3 55 MHz and an SWR of 3 1 at 3 8 MHz Push to turn the antenna tuner ON 2 Select CW mode 3 Turn OFF the break in function p 6 3 4 Push to set to the transmit condition 5 Set 3 55 MHz and key down Set 3 80 MHz and key down 7 Push to return to the receive condition CLOCK AND TIMERS Section ll ETE Jr 11 2 E Daily imer Setting REE es 1
221. m display set mode DATA USB FIL2 14 999 00 VFO A 14 050 00 CW 1 Ich ANT Beep Confirmation Beep Band Edge Beep Sound Quick SPLIT FM SPLIT Offset HF FM SPLIT Otfset 50M SPLIT LOCK 0 100MHz 0 500MHz OFF 17 30 59 UTC 17 30 USB USB FIL2 14 999 00 VFO A MOD DATA2 MOD DATA3 MOD SEND Relay Type External Meter Output External Meter Level 13 5 13 MAINTENANCE E Frequency calibration approximate A very accurate frequency counter is required to cali brate the frequency of the transceiver However a rough check may be performed by receiving radio sta tion WWV WWVH or other standard frequency sig nals 7 CAUTION The IC 7700 has been thoroughly ad 7 justed and tested at the factory before being 4 shipped You should not have to re calibrate it GO Push to select USB mode 2 Push and hold for 1 sec to clear the PBT setting and make sure that the RIT ATX func tion is not activated 3 Set the frequency to the standard frequency station minus 1 kHz e When receiving WWV or WWVH at 15 00000 MHz as a standard frequency set the operating frequency for 14 99900 MHz e Other standard frequencies can be used 4 Push
222. memory keyer contents To send or read the desired memory keyer contents the channel and character codes as follows are used e Channel code V 2 04 14 9 CONTROL COMMAND 14 e Character s code Inserts contest number can be used for 1 channel only Codes for memory name opening message and CLOCK2 name contents To send or read the desired memory name settings the character codes instructed codes for memory keyer contents as above and follows are used e Characters code Alphabetical characters ASCII code ASCII code e Character s code Symbols ASCII code Character Character A Z space A ASCII code 7 i NE SNE 3 Y T o 1 oe 3 2 3 3 3 9 7 5 21 24 26 F 27 B A D E 29 D D F 40 E 14 CONTROL COMMAND Offset frequency setting Color setting The following data sequence is used when sending or The following data sequence is used when sending or reading the offset frequency setting reading the color setting 9 Oj x 9 o q i 2 L ce R Red G G B BI a a E 55 Red Green Blue gt 3 n 2 O D D D Using 0000 0255 for each color element fr N a N D N woo gt EE E I tj E O S Gu il O O O O Or NOO Bandscope edge frequency setting The following data sequence is used when sending or reading the bandscope edge frequency setting 2 2 2 TT oO
223. mmed Downloaded by RadioAmateur EU 12 10 E Display set mode continued Screen Saver Function Turns the screen saver function ON 15 30 or 60 minutes and OFF default 60 min Screen Saver Type Selects the screen saver type from Bound Rota tion and Twist default Bound External Display Select ON when the external display is connected default OFF External Display Sync Pulse Selects the suitable pulse level for the connected ex ternal display from H and L default H Opening Message Turns the opening message screen indication capa bility ON and OFF default ON My Call Sets the introductory text up to 10 character long displayed in the opening screen Usually you set your call sign for the opening screen Capital letters small letters numerals some symbols and spaces can be used 12311 12 SET MODE 60min The screen saver will activate when no operation is performed for the selected time period to protect the LCD from the burn in effect Bound The screen saver indication can be displayed for your reference while pushing and holding F 5 PREVIEW OFF e At least 800x600 pixel resolution is required for the dis play 1 Push F 5 EDIT to select the name edit condition e The cursor under the 1st character blinks Push ABC MF6 abc MF6 123 MF7 or Symbol MF7 to select the character group then rot
224. mode in the temporary pad can be recalled by pushing several times e You may think there are 6 memo pads because 6 different frequencies 5 are in memo pads and 1 is in the temporary pad are called up by MP R 7 If you change the frequency or operating mode G called up from a memo pad with the main dial etc Y the frequency and operating mode in the temporary 7 pad are erased SCANS Section DN nee ee eae eee EE ae een een eee Ass a E E E ve ene E A A A E T WE Voice squelch control function skoene menaanensmsdvadnnkeevbandeie ENE he M Programmed scan operation rnannannnnnnnnennnnrnnnennnnnsnnnnnnnnennr E AF scan operation EN te anndeds tiaueetnnbiseaianwatedededses E Fine programmed scan Fine AF Scan aasrannnnrnnvennnnnnnnnnrnnnennr E Memory scan operation cce ccc eecceeeeeeseceeseeeeseeeesneeseneeas E Select memory scan operation cece eee c ec eeee eee eeeeeaeeaeeeeeeaees E Setting select memory channels cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeaees Setting in SCAN Screen oo eee cece cece cece eee ee eset eeeeeaeeateaeeeaeeas Setting in memory list screen kee ccc c cece cece ee eea seat eaeeeaeeas Erasing the select scan setting cece cece cece eee eeeneeeeeeeeaees ME TONE Scan nee cece cece cece cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeanesganesgeensgnenas 9 1 9 SCANS E Scan types PROGRAMMED SCAN Repeatedly scans between two scan edge frequencies scan edge memor
225. n SSB AM or FM mode Recommended level for an Icom microphone Increases Decreases G 5 Increases VOX SWITCH Push to turn the VOX function ON and OFF dur ing SSB AM and FM mode operation p 6 2 Push and hold for 1 sec to enter VOX set mode p 6 2 v What is the VOX function The VOX function voice operated transmission activates transmission without pushing the transmit switch or PTT switch when you speak into the microphone then auto matically returns to receive when you stop speaking RF POWER CONTROL RF PWR p 3 12 Continuously varies the RF output power from min imum 5 W to maximum 200 W AM mode 5 W to 50 W Increases Decreases BREAK IN SWITCH Push to turn the break in function ON semi break in full break in and OFF during CW mode operation p 6 3 Y What is the break in function The break in function switches transmit and receive with CW keying Full break in QSK can monitor the receive signal between CW dots and dashes 1 3 PANEL DESCRIPTION 1 ELECTRONIC CW KEYER SPEED CONTROL KEY SPEED p 4 4 Adjusts the internal electronic CW keyer s speed e 6 wom min to 48 wom max is the available range Max 48 wom Min 6 wom MONITOR SWITCH p 6 4 Monitors your transmitted IF signal The CW sidetone functions regardless of switch setting in CW mode The MONITOR indicator
226. nction ON and OFF 9 3 scans 9 This function is useful when you don t want unmodu lated signals pausing or cancelling a scan When the voice squelch control function is activated the trans ceiver checks received signals for voice components If a received signal includes voice components and the tone of the voice components changes within 1 sec scan pauses or stops If the received signal includes no voice components or the tone of the voice components does not change within 1 sec scan re sumes w While a phone mode SSB AM or FM is selected push VSC MF7 to switch the VSC Voice Squelch Control function ON and OFF e VSC appears when the function is activated e The VSC function activates for any scan e The VSC function resumes the scan on unmodu lated signals regardless of whether the scan re sume condition is set to ON or OFF SSN When the squelch is open scan continues until it is stopped manually it does not pause on detected sig nals When squelch is closed scan stops when de tecting a signal then resumes according to the scan resume condition Scan speed and the scan resume condition can be set using the scan set mode 1 Push F 5 SCAN to select scan screen 2 Push F 7 SET to select scan set mode 3 Push F 1 A or F 2 V to select the desired item 4 Rotate the main dial to select the desired condition e Push and hold F 4 DEF for 1 sec to select the default setting
227. ncy e lt lt or gt gt appears when the marker is out of range e The spectrum scope shows the transmit signal wave form while transmitting This can be deactivated in scope set mode p 5 5 e The spectrum scope shows the peak level holding func tion Peak levels are displayed in the background of the current spectrum in a different color until the receive fre quency changes This can be deactivated and the wave form color can be set in scope set mode p 5 5 7 Push F 4 HOLD to freeze the current spectrum waveform e HOLD appears while the function is in use e The peak hold function can be deactivated in scope set mode Push to exit the scope screen 7 NOTE If a strong signal is received a ghost wave 7 form may appear Push F 2 ATT several times to 7 activate the spectrum scope attenuator in this case Spurious signal waveforms may be displayed They are generated in the internal scope circuit and do not indicate a transceiver malfunction SSN Fixed mode i COM DI EGG 20 Of D ad ce Coe 000 og 11 58 35 UTC 11 58 uso VFO A USB FIL2 14 100 00 lt oe
228. nd microphone as far away as possible from the mag netic navigation compass to prevent erroneous indica tions Turn I O switch on the rear panel OFF and or dis connect the AC power cable from the AC outlet when you will not use the transceiver for long period of time For U S A only CAUTION Changes or modifications to this device not expressly approved by Icom Inc could void your authority to operate this device under FCC regulations SUPPLIED AGGESSORIES 1 AC power Cable mrumnurennnrvnnerennvrvvnerennerensene 1 DF E E canteens E E 1 pair 3 Spare fuse FGB 2 A mmuvnerrnnnvnervnrennenseren 1 RCA pIUGS e ee eeeeeceeececeeeeeeeseueeeeseneeeeeeaeeeess 2 ope Tr 1 6 2 CONGUCION VS DIUGS derincnnectancndtaadacaveceonmees 3 7 3 conductor 18 PIUGS rererrvnrrrrrnrrrrvnrrrrvnnne 2 3 conductor 14 PIUGS rrrrrrrrvrerrrvrrrrvnrerrvenne 3 9 ACC plugs 7 pin rrrrerronrrrrrenrrerrvnrernrvsnnn 1 ACC plugs 8 pin rrrrrrrnrrrrrvnrrrrrvrrrnrvsnnn 1 D Antenna connector caps rrrrrrrnrrnrrvrnnnnr 4 2 Hiding screws for screw holet n c 6 ES Ellas career eee ee ree 1 Main dial screw and hexagonal wrench gt gt m gt C0 oes CD af cu u mH a cu a lt a gt w gt O w May differ from that shown according to version These screw are used when removing rack mounting han dles See p 2 3 for rack mounting handle detachment de tails S
229. nd read beep gain 0 min to 255 max Send read beep gain limit 0 OFF 1 ON Send read headphones output ratio 0 0 60 to 255 1 40 Send read AF output level to ACC 0 0 to 255 1 00 Send read S P DIF output level 0 0 to 255 1 00 Send read MOD output level to ACC 0 0 to 255 100 Send read S P DIF MOD output level 0 0 to 255 100 Send read MOD input connector during DATA OFF 0 MIG 1 ACC 2 MIC ACC 3 S P DIF Send read MOD input connector during DATA1 0 MIG 1 ACC 2 MIC ACC 3 S P DIF Send read MOD input connector during DATA2 0 MIG 1 ACC 2 MIC ACC 3 S P DIF Send read MOD input connector during DATA3 0 MIG 1 ACC 2 MIC ACC 3 S P DIF Send read relay type selection 0 Lead 1 MOS FET Send read external meter output selection 0 Auto 1 S 2 Po 3 SWR 4 ALG 5 COMP 6 Vb 7 ID Send read external meter output level 0 0 to 255 100 Send read reference signal in out setting 0 OFF 1 IN 2 OUT Send read reference signal fre quency setting 0 0 to 255 1 00 Send read LCD unit backlight brightness 0 0 to 255 100 Send read switch indicator bright ness 0 0 to 255 100 Send read screen image type 0 A 1 B Send read frequency readout font 0 Basic 1 1 Basic 2 2 Italic 3 Round 4 Slim Send read meter response setting 0 SLOW 1 MID 2 FAST Send read meter type 0 Standard 1 Edgewise 2 Bar Send read meter type during wide screen or mini scope indication 0 Edg
230. neancnvessncoresaneostecnedeacseneonteoni sawn 13 2 Transceiver pOwer panelene enken 13 2 OHM ANG FCCCIVG Janssens iisi 13 2 PS eraras EAE N tense ees 13 3 gt BLE 0 EEE NE EE EOE 13 3 O Format USB MENON seccicessecscacceecadenepeadenedenceceedapessedaciaees 13 3 W Main dial brake adjustment cece cece eee eee eeeeeaeeeaeeeneeeas 13 3 E OGWR og 0 EE 13 4 M Screen type and font selections arnnnnnennnnnnnnennennerrerrennennen 13 4 WE Frequency calibration approximate rrnnvunnernnernnrennennvenner 13 5 E Opening the transceiver S case ccccce cece cece eee eeseeaeeteneees 13 6 M Clock backup battery replacement ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeneenens 13 6 viii TABLE OF CONTENTS MI Fuse replacement rrnnnnannnnnnnnennnnennnnnsnnennnnennnennnnnnnnnnnnner 13 7 E Resetting the CPU ee 13 7 M About protection indications arrrnrennnnnannvennnvennvnrnnnennnnnnnner 13 8 E Screen saver fUNCHOM re 13 8 Section 14 CONTROL COMMAND M Remote jack CI V information ccccceeceese eee eeseeeeeeneeeees 14 2 CI V connection example ccc ece cece eee eeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeneeanes 14 2 PET re 14 2 Command table 4vuasgesemareseilenmaneedes teken 14 3 To send read memory contents rannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnmnnnnnennnn 14 9 Band stacking register cninssiertnintadiiuewndiaatndeiaseescmcsasetnctanes 14 9 Codes for memory keyer contents rnrunnnnnnnnnnnnn
231. ner remains OFF even when the SWR is poor 1 5 3 1 default e ON Automatic tune starts even when the tuner is turned OFF during HF bands operation 12 SET MODE HM Others set mode continued Transverter Function Selects the transverter operation condition from Auto and ON default Auto Transverter Offset Sets the desired offset frequency for the transverter operation within 0 000 to 99 999 MHz in 1 kHz steps default 16 000 MHz RTTY Mark Frequency Selects the RTTY mark frequency RTTY mark fre quency is switched between 1275 1615 and 2125 Hz default 2125 Hz 2125 Hz is automatically selected when the internal RTTY decoder is used RTTY Shift Width Selects the RTTY shift width There are 3 selectable values 170 200 and 425 Hz default 170 Hz 170 Hz is automatically selected when the internal RTTY decoder is used RTTY Keying Polarity Selects the RTTY keying polarity Normal or reverse keying polarity can be selected default Normal PSK Tone Frequency Selects the desired PSK tone frequency for the PSK reception from 1000 1500 and 2000 Hz default 1500 Hz SPEECH Language Selects the speech language from English and Japan ese default English SPEECH Speed Selects the speech speed from HIGH faster and LOW slower default HIGH Auto e ON Turn the transverter operation ON e Auto The transceiver turns into transverter opera tion condition when 2 to 13
232. ngs e Adjustment range is set to half of the IF filter passband width 25 Hz steps and 50 Hz steps are available v What is the PBT control The PBT function electronically modifies the IF passband width to reject interference This transceiver uses the DSP circuit for the PBT function Center Low cut High cut l Ga ee TE AN RIT ATX rec Pav O VOICE MEMORY PBT CLEAR SWITCH p 5 12 Clears the PBT settings when pushed and held for 1 sec e The PBT CLR indicator above this switch lights when PBT is in use DIGITAL RF SELECTOR SWITCH p 5 18 Turns the digital RF preselector ON and OFF e The DIGI SEL indicator lights green when the prese lector is in use DIGITAL RF SELECTOR CONTROL DIGI SEL p 5 18 Adjusts the digital RF selector center frequency e The control can be reassigned as the audio peak filter adjustment p 12 16 Higher frequency Lower frequency amp MANUAL NOTCH FILTER CONTROL NOTCH outer control p 5 18 Varies the valley frequency of the manual notch fil ter to reject an interfering signal while the manual notch function is ON e Notch filter center frequency SSB 1060 Hz to 4040 Hz CW CW pitch freq 2540 Hz to CW pitch freq 2540 Hz AM 5100 Hz to 5100 Hz Lower frequency NOTCH SWITCH p 5 18 w Switches the notch function between auto man ual and OFF in SSB and AM modes Turns the manual n
233. nnnnnnnnennnnennnensnn 7 7 M Sending a recorded message rrarnunnannnannnennnannnnnnnannnnnnnennenne 7 8 Transmit level setting occ cece ence eee eee ee eaeeeeneeneneenaees 7 8 WE Voice set mode ve 7 9 M Saving a voice memory into the USB Memory rarrrnnnnnennnnnnenr 7 10 Saving the received audio Memory cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 7 10 Saving the TX memory ou ccc cece ese ece eee ee cesses eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 7 10 MEMORY OPERATION E Memory Fe ge Sp 8 2 E Memory channel selection uurarsernenmeradv msersssnusdvtede 8 2 Using the a W keyS mmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmme 8 2 Using the keypad ve 8 2 E Memory channel programming srrunvennvannvennennnennnennnnnnnnnnenene 8 3 Programming in VFO mode Saeed 8 3 Programming in memory mode annrunnnnnennvnnnannennnnnnnnnnnnennse 8 3 E Fre u ncy transiermring EE 8 4 Transferring in VFO mode EE 8 4 Transferring in memory mode ranruneunnennennvnnnennennvennenneunne 8 4 E Memory list screen EE 8 5 Selecting a memory channel using the memory list screen 8 5 Confirming programmed memory channels rrrrnrnnernnrnennenr 8 5 E Memon MIMOS EE EE 8 6 Editing programming memory Names rrunrernnnnnrernnnnnnernenn 8 6 E emor ge ea ao NE IS 8 6 E Memo padS ve 8 7 Writing frequencies and operating modes into memo pads 8 7 Calling up a frequency from a memo Pad ccc cece cence eee 8 7 SCANS DN es
234. nnnnnnnnnenn 14 9 Codes for memory name opening message and CLOCK2 name contents cic cnctesecavcreacondenteneeegedneameanenes 14 9 Offset frequency setting siscnissiauriosuneciseeuierssianneaditacwcanenes 14 10 Repeater tone tone squelch frequency setting 668 14 10 SSB transmission passband width setting rrnraarennrnnner 14 10 O Color Seling Sr Enae N EE NSi 14 10 Bandscope edge frequency setting rnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 14 10 Data mode with filter width setting rnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnen 14 10 Antenna memory setting suumunsessarsvrskoseeansorenohenneevnd ett 14 10 Section 15 SPECIFICATIONS AND OPTIONS ENN ve 15 2 S General ce ketraee oes sates cent cece eae eee ee Saeed caK aussie teen eee rene 15 2 GT Gadeecwatuonsepedycosaecunssecuoserdeddasidansenvanecesnarastueer 15 2 OPEN ed 15 3 CAUSE versene 15 3 BE eeepc tense ensereeren A EE T 15 4 Section 16 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE E General EEE 16 2 EO UON eepe E E EE TNE 16 2 WE Preparation doeteceiaeascentcenseaannen nea ateeenteccaaneta nen keteaecabetiaanomes 16 3 gt Firmware and firm utility coscricnnmsocenvnrnenrantucemisenameveticrananesis 16 3 File downloading reden 16 3 E Firmware update USB Memory ranvnnnannnnnvnnnannnnnnnnvennennnene 16 4 E Firmware update EE 16 6 GE seetces cues Ene ENNE EEE E 16 6 IP address setting secasaedacecseranavervdewseedsdanieeeenesucemenesend shes 16 7 Up
235. nting handle from both side See p 2 3 for rack mounting handle detachment details 2 Remove the 8 screws from the top of the trans ceiver and the 6 screws from the sides then lift up the top cover 3 Turn the transceiver upside down Y CAUTION NEVER HOLD THE MAIN DIAL OR 7 ANY OTHER KNOBS when the transceiver is 7 being turned upside down This may damage the transceiver 4 Remove 7 screws from the bottom then lift up the bottom cover E Clock backup battery replacement 13 6 The IC 7700 has a lithium backup battery CR2032 in side for clock and timer functions The usual life of the backup battery is approximately 2 years When the backup battery is discharged the transceiver transmits and receives normally but cannot retain the current time 7 WARNING DISCONNECT the AC power cable 7 from the AC outlet before removing the transceiver s 7 cover 1 Remove the top cover as shown above Q Replace the clock backup battery located on the front panel as illustrated at left e Make sure the battery polarity is correct 3 Return the top cover to the original position Set the date and time in time set mode p 11 2 E Fuse replacement E Resetting the CPU POWER COM FE OG GSE 5 or SSN O O CO JS so Go 6G
236. nu screen e Pushing and holding for 1 sec also selects set mode menu screen 3 Push F 5 OTHERS to enter Others set mode 4 Push F 1 A or F 2 to select MAIN DIAL Auto TS 5 Rotate the main dial to select the desired condition from high low and OFF e High Approx 5 times faster e Low Approx twice faster e OFF Auto tuning step is turned OFF 6 Push to exit the set mode When you tune outside of an amateur band s frequency range a warning beep sounds This function can be turned OFF in set mode if de sired GO Push several times to close a multi func tion screen if necessary 2 Push F 7 SET to select set mode menu screen e Pushing and holding for 1 sec also selects set mode menu screen 3 Push F5 OTHERS to enter Others set mode 4 Push F 1 4 or F 2 V to select Beep Band Edge 5 Rotate the main dial to turn the band edge warning beep ON and OFF 6 Push to exit the set mode 3 BASIC OPERATIONS E Operating mode selection EI com OBES 5 20 OF 0 O USB lt gt LSB CW lt gt CW R LLL RTTY R lt gt RITTY lt ae gt PSK lt gt PSK R AM lt gt FM en USB lt
237. o Only the auto notch can be used e Manual Only the manual notch can be used e Auto Manual Both the auto and manual notch can be used default DIGI SEL e DIGI SEL DIGI SEL control functions as the digi tal selector operation default e APF DIGI SEL control functions as the audio peak filter adjustment OFF e ON The displayed frequency shifts when the op erating mode is changed between SSB and CW e OFF The displayed frequency does not shift SHARP SOFT Soft filter shape makes distinguishing noise and signals easier The audio filter width is related to the CW pitch setting e SHARP Sharp filter shape rejects interference signals HM Others set mode continued External Keypad VOICE Sets the external keypad for voice message trans mission capability ON and OFF See page 2 7 for the equivalent circuit of an external keypad and connection External Keypad KEYER Sets the external keypad for keyer memory transmis sion capability ON and OFF See page 2 7 for the equivalent circuit of an external keypad and connection CI V Baud Rate Sets the CI V data transfer rate 300 1200 4800 9600 19200 bps and Auto are available default Auto When Auto is selected the baud rate is automati cally set according to the data rate of connected con troller CI V Address To distinguish equipment each CI V transceiver has its own Icom standard address in hexa
238. o matically push 7 CAUTION When removing the USB Memory un G mount operation is necessary If you do not unmount 77 the memory in this case data in the USB memory 7 may be corrupted 1 Push and hold F 6UNMOUNT for 1 sec e Confirmation screen appears 2 Push F 6 OK to unmount the USB Memory 3 After PAJ indication disappears remove the USB Memory MOOK SET MODE E Formatting the USB Memory USE MEMORY SET USB MEMORY MENU Load memory a LOAD xx FORMAT sack SAVE FIRM UP FORMAT UNMOUNT Save yow mem Update the fir Format the USB Unmount the US Select FAT or FATS USB MEMORY SET USB MEMORY MENU LOAD Load memory a SAVE FIRM UP FORMAT UNMOUNT lt x FORMAT sack Save your mem Update the fir Format the USB Unmount the US Changing the format to FATS2 will erase ALL data currently programmed De you want to format it now CANCEL USB MEMORY SET USB MEMORY MENU LOAD Load memory a SAVE FIRM UP FORMAT UNMOUNT toer FORMATTING KEE Save your mem Update the firm Format the USB Unmount the US Please wall SAVE FIRM UP FORMAT UNMOUNT USB MEMORY SET USB MEMORY MENU LOAD Load memory a SAVE FIRM UP FORMAT UNMOUNT sax NO USS MEMOAY 15 FOUND sac Check the following Save your mem Update the fir Format the USB Unmount the US nsert USB Memory The USB Memory type OK 12 26 Saved data in the USB Memory can be erased Y IMP
239. o 500 kHz band width can be specified so either edge frequency will be set to the difference between higher and lower frequencies from 5 to 500 kHz automatically while setting another edge 77 frequency 14 000 14 350 MHz Set the frequencies within 11 000 to 15 000 MHz range in 1 kHz steps 7 Up to 500 kHz band width can be specified so Y either edge frequency will be set to the difference 7 between higher and lower frequencies from 5 to 7 500 kHz automatically while setting another edge Y frequency 18 068 18 168 MHz Set the frequencies within 15 000 to 20 000 MHz range in 1 KHz steps 7 Up to 500 kHz band width can be specified so Y either edge frequency will be set to the differ Y ence between higher and lower frequencies from 45 to 500 kHz automatically while setting another 7 edge frequency 21 000 21 450 MHz Set the frequencies within 20 000 to 22 000 MHz range in 1 KHz steps 7 Up to 500 kHz band width can be specified so 7 either edge frequency will be set to the difference between higher and lower frequencies become 5 77 to 500 kHz automatically while setting another 7 edge frequency 24 890 24 990 MHz Set the frequencies within 22 000 to 26 000 MHz range in 1 KHz steps 7 Up to 500 kHz band width can be specified so 7 either edge frequency will be set to the difference between higher and lower frequencies from 5 to 500 kHz automatically while setting another edge frequency 5S
240. ode p 3 6 VFO SELECT SWITCH Switches the selected VFO between the VFO A and VFO B when pushed e Switches between transmit frequency and receive fre quency when the split frequency function is ON p 6 6 MEMORY WRITE SWITCH p 8 3 Stores the selected readout frequency and operat ing mode into the displayed memory channel when pushed and held for 1 sec e This function is available both in VFO and memory modes MEMO PAD WRITE SWITCH p 8 7 Programs the displayed readout frequency and op erating mode into a memo pad e The 5 most recent entries remain in memo pads e The memo pad capacity can be expanded from 5 to 10 in set mode p 12 15 MEMO PAD READ SWITCH p 8 7 Each push calls up a frequency and operating mode ina memo pad The 5 or 10 most recently pro grammed frequencies and operating modes can be recalled starting from the most recent e The memo pad capacity can be expanded from 5 to 10 in set mode p 12 15 VFO MEMORY SWITCH Switches the selected readout operating mode between the VFO and memory when pushed pgs 3 3 8 2 Transfers the memory contents to VFO when pushed and held for 1 sec p 8 4 VFO EQUALIZING SWITCH p 3 3 Transfers the undisplayed VFO frequency to the displayed VFO frequency when pushed and held for 1 sec FILTER SWITCH p 5 13 Selects one of 3 IF filter settings Enters the filter set screen when pushed and held for 1 sec amp A
241. odyne system 64 455 MHz 36 kHz SSB CW RTTY BW 2 4 kHz 10 dB S N 0 100000 1 799999 MHz 1 800000 29 990000 MHz 50 000000 54 000000 MHz AM BW 6 kHz 10 dB S N 0 100000 1 799999 MHz 1 800000 29 990000 MHz 50 000000 54 000000 MHz FM BW 15 kHz 12 dB SINAD 28 000000 29 990000 MHz 50 000000 54 000000 MHz e Internal Modulate Distortion typical e Selectivity SSB RTTY BW 2 4 kHz CW BW 500 Hz AM BW 6 kHz FM BW 15 kHz e Spurious and image rejection ratio e Squelch sensitivity pre amp OFF SSB CW RTTY PSK31 FM e RIT variable range e Audio output power e PHONES connector e EXT SP connectors Antenna tuner e Matching impedance range e Minimum operating input e Tuning accuracy e Insertion loss after tuning 0 5 uV pre amp 1 ON 0 16 uV pre amp 1 ON 0 13 uV pre amp 2 ON 6 3 uV pre amp 1 ON 2 UV pre amp 1 ON 1 uV pre amp 2 ON 0 5 uV pre amp 1 ON 0 32 uV pre amp 2 ON Dynamic range 105 dB at 14 100 MHz 100 kHz separation pre amp OFF CW mode BW 500 Hz More than 2 4 kHz 3 dB Less than 3 6 kHz 60 dB More than 500 Hz 3 dB Less than 700 Hz 60 dB More than 6 0 kHz 3 dB Less than 15 0 kKHz 60 dB More than 12 0 kHz 6 dB Less than 20 0 kKHz 60 dB More than 70 dB except IF through on 50 MHz band Less than 5 6 uV Less than 1 uV 19 999 kHz More than 2 6 W at 10 distortion with an 8 Q load 3 conductor 6 35 d mm 1 4
242. old level cece cece eee eee eee eee 4 23 PSK memory transmission sa cncectervcnecaateraniicestaeedeelcmasdaseenets 4 24 Automatic transmission reception setting cccceeeeeeeenees 4 24 Editing PSK MEMO ee 4 25 PSK decode set mode rrnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnennnennnennnsnnne 4 26 CO ala SAVING ven 4 28 E Operating AM 2avreeprreeree Grenen 4 29 Convenient functions for receive cece cece cece ence eee eeeeeeeeeeas 4 29 Convenient functions for transmit cc cece cee ee eens eee eee ees 4 30 KEN testecerictcnesecceceteasaecencoenamaeaedeeeases en setecerauaeree es 4 31 Convenient functions for receive eee cece eee e eee eeeeeeeeeaeenas 4 31 Convenient functions for transmit c cece eee ee cece eee eee eee ees 4 31 TABLE OF CONTENTS MI Repeater operation ccc ecce cece cece eeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeganeeeneneans 4 32 Repeater tone frequency setting annrunnrannrnnvenanennvennvenner 4 33 Mi Tone squelch operation cece cece cece cece cece eee e eee eeaeeeaeeeeeeaas 4 34 E Data mode AFSK operation svaner ansees eee 4 35 Section 5 FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE ME Spectrum SCOPE SCreeN oo eee cece eee e cece cece eee eeee eases eeaeeaeeeeenaees 5 2 Center mode EE EE 5 2 PENNE sererek ne E E EI RE 5 3 Mini scope screen indication uarrunnnunnennvnnnnennvnnanennvennnnnner 5 4 SENER aaaea ia Ea 5 4 EOT aE EEE AEE R EA 5 9 HSE
243. ompression level readout ALC level readout VD readout Multi function digital meter F 1 EE com fit fc GI 500 2009 Da Boa 3 10 The S RF meter indication during transmit can be se lected from the following items as you desire Push METER MF2 several times to select the de sired item Indicates the RF output power in watts Po METER SWR begins to activate when the RF output METER ALC power reaches a preset level METER Indicates the compression level when COMP the speech compressor is in use METER Indicates the drain current of the final ID amplifier MOSFETS we Indicates the drain terminal voltage of the final amplifier MOSFETs Indicates the VSWR on the transmission line Indicates the ALC level The ALC circuit The IC 7700 can display the multi function digital meter on the LCD display This meter displays all transmit parameters simultaneously 1 Push and hold METER for 1 sec to turn the multi function digital meter ON 2 Push F 1 P HOLD to toggle the peak level hold function ON B appears on the window title when the peak level hold function is ON 3 Push and hold METER for 1 sec o
244. on only 3 Push EXIT SET to exit antenna set screen Receive antenna I O setting Band keys BW 500 SFT o hi BPF FIL2 cw 10 120 00 1 14 195 00 USB ANT ANT MEMORY ANT Switeh 15 00 Auto ANT TYPE ANTI AX TX ANT2 RX TX ANTS AXITX ANTA AXITA 45 00 1 Ax LO Ene 45 00 Temporary Memory OFF ANT MA ANT MW TEMP M ANT SW ANT TYPE RX O indicators appear when RX ANT IN and RX ANT OUT are active 10 5 ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION 10 In default setting receive antenna connectors RX ANT IN and RX ANT OUT on the rear panel are de activated and are connected internally by the switch ing relay If you want to connect an external preamp or low pass filter between the RX ANT IN and RX ANT OUT you must activate them as described below 1 Select the antenna set screen 2 Select the desired frequency band with a band key 3 Push F 1 RX I O to activate the receive antenna connectors RX ANT IN and RX ANT OUT e RX I O indicators appear when RX ANT IN and RX ANT OUT are active 4 Repeat steps and Q if desired Push to exit antenna set screen 10 ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION E
245. onnecting a PC keyboard p 2 6 RTTY operation can be performed without an external RTTY terminal TNC or PC If you would rather use your RT TY terminal or TNC consult the manual that comes with the RT TY terminal or TNC 1 Push a band key to select the desired band 2 Push to select RTTY e After RTTY mode is selected push and hold for 1 sec to toggle between RT TY and RT TY R modes e RTTY or RI TY R appears 3 Push F 3 DECODE to display the decode screen e The IC 7700 has a built in Baudot decoder 4 To tune the desired signal aim for a symmetrical waveform and ensure the peak points align with the mark 2125 Hz and shift 170 Hz frequency lines in the FFT scope e The S meter indicates received signal strength when Signal is received 5 Press F12 on the connected keyboard to transmit e TX indicator lights red 6 Type from the keyboard to enter the contents that you want to transmit e The typewritten contents are indicated in the TX buffer screen and transmitted immediately e The text color will be changed when transmitted e Press one of F1 F8 to transmit the TX memory con tents 7 Press F12 on the keyboard to return to receive For your convenience The transmission contents can be typed before being transmitted 1 Perform the steps to above 2 Type from the connected keyboard to enter the message that you want to transmit e The typewritten contents are indic
246. ons ccceeceececeeeeeceeseess 2 9 M Microphone connector information c cece ecee eee eee teens eeaees 2 10 E Microphones OPTIONS maren 2 10 ONE aea E E E E seen sesecsueeesae sane ous 2 10 TANGO EE EE EE 2 10 M Accessory connector information ccccee cece eeeee esas tease eeaees 2 11 G CAUTIONI The transceiver weighs approx 24 kg 53 Ib G Always have two people available to carry lift or G turn over the transceiver 2 1 2 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS E Unpacking E Main dial attachment Dial brake adjustment Fig 1 2 3 Shorter than 1 mm 1 32 in After unpacking immediately report any damage to the delivering carrier or dealer Keep the shipping cartons For a description and a diagram of accessory equip ment included with the IC 7700 see Supplied acces sories on p ili of this manual The main dial is shipped unattached to the transceiver to prevent possible damage to the dial shaft or rotary encoder during shipping Please attach the dial as de scribed below A CAUTION NEVER hold any controller knob s such as the main dial when carrying or lift ing the transceiver This will damage the dial shaft or rotary encoder 1 Slide the dial brake adjustment to the right position Fig 1 e The dial brakes move inward as shown 2 Remove the rubber cover of the main dial Fig 2 3 Insert
247. oo 6 60 IC 7 700 ALL CLEAR 13 7 MAINTENANCE 13 When no external DC output is available from EXT DC and ACC connectors the internal fuse may be open Replace the fuse in this case 7 WARNING DISCONNECT the AC power cable G from the AC outlet before removing the transceiver s 7 cover 1 Remove the bottom cover as shown left 2 Remove the 8 screws from the shield cover of the transceiver s bottom side 3 Replace the open fuse with a new properly rated one FGB 2 A as shown at left 4 Return the inside cover and bottom cover and screws to the original position 1 Turn the main power switch on the rear panel ON e Make sure the transceiver power is still OFF 2 While pushing and holding and MW push to turn power ON e The internal CPU is reset e The CPU start up takes approx 5 sec e The transceiver displays its initial VFO frequencies when resetting is complete 3 Correct the set mode settings after resetting if de sired 7 NOTE Resetting CLEARS all programmed con Y tents in memory channels and returns programmed Y values in set mode to default values 13 MAINTENANCE E About protection indications MULTI FUNCTION METER 5 Check the temperature E Screen saver function ET feom OG Gas oO O
248. operation After an antenna has been selected for use by push ing ANT MF1 the antenna is automatically selected whenever that band is used EXAMPLE a 3 5 7 MHz antenna is connected to ANT1 a 21 28 MHz antenna is connected to ANT2 a 50 MHz antenna is connected to ANT3 When the antenna selector function is set to Auto an antenna is automatically selected when changing bands A receive only antenna can be specified for ANT4 When Manual is selected you can use the all an tenna connectors ANT1 ANT2 ANT3 and ANT4 however band memory does not function In this case you must select an antenna manually In this case only ANT1 antenna connector can be used ANT MF1 switch does not function E Antenna memory settings ANT Band keys EI com GI oO O JE 0 5 ANT MEMORY 15 00 2000 1 20 00 22 00 0 76 00 40 00 1 O Oo ANT Switeh Auto LA ANT TYPE ANTI RXYTX ANT2 AX TX ANTS AKITA ANTA AXTA P 30 00 45 00 1 45 00 6f i Temporary Memory OFF o0 15001 i AX 1 0 ANT MR ANT MW TEMP M ANT SW ANT TYPE Antenna type selection
249. ory keyer e Memory keyer edit screen SFT 0 BPF cw FIL2 14 100 000 UR SNN ex CFM TU QRZ e Example entered QSL TU DE JA3YUA TEST into memory keyer channel 3 KEYER EDIT CQ TEST OG TEST DE ICOM ICOM TEST UR SMNI BX SPACE e Pre programmed contents C Contents Mi CQ TEST CQ TEST DE ICOM ICOM TEST memo H M1 M3 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4 The contents of the memory keyer memories can be set using the memory keyer edit menu The memory keyer can memorize and re transmit 4 CW key codes for often used CW sentences contest serial numbers etc Total capacity of the memory keyer is 70 charac ters per memory channel e Programming contents During CW mode operation push to select memory keyer screen 2 Push to select memory keyer menu then push to select keyer edit screen e Memory keyer contents of Channel 1 M1 is selected Push several times to select the de sired memory keyer channel to be edited 4 Push MF6 or MF7 or MF7 to select the character group then rotate the main dial to select the character or push the keypad for num ber input e Symbol appears when MF7 is pushed when 123 character group is selected e Sele
250. ory mode e To program a blank channel use direct frequency entry with the keypad or memo pads etc 3 Push and hold for 1 sec to program the displayed frequency and operating mode into the memory channel 8 MEMORY OPERATION E Frequency transferring Transferring in VFO mode TRANSFERRING EXAMPLE IN VFO MODE Operating frequency 21 320 MHz USB VFO Contents of M ch 16 14 018 MHz CW P AMP VFO A USB FIL2 21 320 00 2 14 195 00 USB VFO A USB FIL e 1 320 00 16 14 018 00 CW VFO A cw FIL2 14 018 00 16 14018000 CW Transferring in memory mode TRANSFERRING EXAMPLE IN MEMORY MODE Operating frequency 21 320 MHz USB M ch 16 Contents of M ch 16 14 018 MHz CW 16ch Cw FIL 14 018 00 VFO A Pr eep VM Beep Push for 1 sec Beep 16ch cw FIL 14 018 00 VFO A 14 018 00 CW Programmed contents appear 8 4 The frequency and operating mode in a memory chan nel can be transferred to the VFO Frequency transfer ring can be performed in either VFO mode or memory mode This is useful for transferring programmed contents to a VFO Select VFO mode with VM 2 Select the memory channel to be transferred with a Lv e Memory list screen is convenient for selecting the de sired channel e Memory channel contents appear in the memory chan nel readout below the frequency readout e _ appears if the selected memory channel is a blank
251. otate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255 mm 255 ee 255 e Push F 3 lt 4 gt to select R Red G Green and B Blue and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT Data saving The USB Memory is not supplied by Icom F 5 ET feom EEE GG mja i S Soa G PP o 0 o o G O OPTION WIDE A EXIT SET Main dial Decode file save screen acc DECODE FILE SAVE MID 1 4 OFF VEG OFF 493 0MB A ee SOG 2TOI TXT DIR FILE EDIT OPTION SAVE WIDE Decode file save screen file name edit AGG DECODE FILE SAVE MID i 114 OFF vec OFF 493 008 AEAF 2701 TXT DIR FILE OPTION SAVE Save option screen SAVE OPTION lee Te 7 t 4 28 The contents of the PSK memory and received signal can be saved into the USB Memory 1 During PSK decode screen indication push F 1 lt MENU1 gt to select PSK decode second menu 2 Push F 5 SAVE to select decode file save screen 3 Change the following conditions if desired e File name 1 Push F 4 EDIT to select file name edit con dition e Push F 1 DIR FILE several times to select the file name if necessary 2
252. otch function ON and OFF when pushed in CW RT TY and PSK31 mode gt Turns the auto notch function ON and OFF when pushed in FM mode NN appears when manual notch is in use EV appears when auto notch is in use w Switches the manual notch characteristics from wide middle and narrow when pushed and held for 1 sec What is the notch function The notch function is a narrow filter that eliminates un wanted CW or AM carrier tones while preserving the de sired voice signal The DSP circuit automatically adjusts the filtering frequency to effectively eliminate unwanted tones RIT ATX CONTROL RIT ATX pgs 5 10 6 4 Shifts the receive and or transmit frequency without changing the transmit and or receive frequency shown on the main VFO e Rotate the control clockwise to increase the frequency or rotate the control counterclockwise to decrease the frequency The RIT or ATX functions must be ON Frequency DD increases Frequency SO decreases e The shift frequency range is 9 999 kHz in 1 Hz steps or 9 99 kHz in 10 Hz steps 1 PANEL DESCRIPTION CW PITCH CONTROL CW PITCH p 4 5 Shifts the received CW audio pitch and the CW side tone pitch without changing the operating frequency High frequency Low frequency RIT SWITCH p 5 10 Turns the RIT function ON and OFF when pushed e Use RIT ATX control to vary the RIT frequency Adds the RIT shift frequency to the operating f
253. owing URL to download the firm utility and the latest firmware http www icom co jp world support index htm For updating from the USB Memory When updating the firmware from the USB Memory copy the downloaded firmware data e g 7700 110 dat to the USB Memory in IC 7700 folder using an avail able USB port USB hub may be required purchased sep arately from your PC dealer File downloading 1 Access the following URL directly http www icom co jp world support index htm ea mm on Wen 2 Read Regarding this Download Service carefully pe evita then click AGREE 3 Click Transceiver link then click the firmware file see link Gass Read carefully Ble rer 4 Click Save in the displayed File Download dialog Some files can harm your computer If the file information below looks suspicious or you do not fully trust the source do not open or save this file File name File type From WWW icom co jp Click Would you like to open th file or save it to pour computer Always ask before opening this type of file 5 Select the desired location in which you want to Select the saving save the firmware then click Save in the displayed location File Download dialog e File download starts 6 After download is completed extract the file e The firmware and the firm utility are compressed in zip format respectively e When updating the transceiver using with the
254. pe memory scan or set mode screen display Displays set mode menu screen when pushed and held for 1 sec MAIN DIAL Changes the displayed frequency selects set mode setting etc LOCK SWITCH LOCK p 5 17 Push to switch the dial lock function ON and OFF SPEECH SWITCH p 3 11 Push to announce the S meter indication and the selected frequency The selected operating mode is additionally an nounced when pushed and held for 1 sec SPLIT SWITCH p 6 6 Turns the split function ON and OFF when pushed Turns the split function ON When pushed and held for 1 sec in non FM modes transfers the unselected VFO s readout frequency to the se lected VFO s readout and sets the unselected VFO to transmit VFO Quick split function e The offset frequency is shifted from the selected VFO frequency in FM mode p 12 13 e The quick split function can be turned OFF using set mode p 12 12 Turns the split function ON and shifts the unse lected VFO frequency after inputting an offset 1 PANEL DESCRIPTION E Front panel continued TWIN PBT COMP MONI GAIN VOX GAIN ANTI VOX CONTRAST BRIGHT PASSBAND TUNING CONTROLS TWIN PBT p 5 12 Adjusts the receiver s IF filter oassband width via the DSP e Passband width and shift frequency are displayed in the multi function display e Push and hold for 1 sec to clear the PBT setti
255. push 10 a fene 18 11028 9 14 5 FNPar I PANEL DESCRIPTION E Front panel continued 0 08 CELE GREG TWIN PBT DRIVE MODE SWITCHES Selects the desired mode p 3 8 e Announces selected mode via the speech synthesizer p 12 15 Selects USB and LSB modes alter nately Selects CW and CW R CW reverse modes alternately Switches between RTTY and PSK mode Switches RTTY and RTTY R RTTY reverse mode when pushed and held for 1 sec in RTTY mode w Switches PSK and PSK R PSK re verse mode when pushed and held for 1 sec in PSK mode Selects AM and FM modes alternately Selects SSB AM or FM data mode USB D LSB D AM D FM D when pushed in SSB AM or FM mode re spectively Switches D1 D2 and D3 when pushed and held for 1 sec O VOICE MEMOR 1 8 QUICK TUNING SWITCH TS Turns the quick tuning step ON and OFF p 3 6 e While the quick tuning indicator Y is displayed above the frequency indication the frequency can be changed in programmed kHz steps 0 1 1 5 9 10 12 5 20 and 25 kHz steps are avail able for each operating mode independently When the quick tuning step is OFF push and hold for 1 sec to turn the 1 Hz tuning step ON and OFF p 3 7 When the quick tuning step is ON push and hold for 1 sec to enter quick tuning step set m
256. push F 2 A4F e Rotating the main dial also cancels the scan Push and hold F 6 RECALL for 1 sec to recall the frequency that was set before starting the scan scans 9 E Fine programmed scan Fine AF scan O com 200 gt o VFO A ANY 1 1 14 aa OBES 5 20 OG 0000 000 00 PROGRAM SCAN D 9 8 8 0 500 00 MHz 29 999 99 MHz Recall 14 203 36 MHz 4F SPAN RECALL USB FIL2 88498 Osan g AF SCAN ps OenterY 1445 00 MHz 4F Span 10 kHz Recall 14 195 00 MHZ 4F SPAN RECALL 9 5 In fine scan programmed or AF the scan speed de creases when the squelch opens but the transceiver keeps scanning The scanning tuning step shifts from 50 Hz to 10 Hz when the squelch opens 1 Push several times to close a multi func tion screen if necessary 2 Push F 5 SCAN to select the scan screen 3 Set for programmed scan or AF scan as described on previous page 4 Push F 1 PROG or F 2 AF to start a scan ONE of We and decimal points blink while scanning 5 Push F 3 FINE to start a fine scan CNE or GSA blinks in stead of HANE or PNB espec tively When the scan detects a signal th
257. quency 7 f the dial lock function is activated the lock indicator G lights and the main dial does not function In this 7 case push LOCK to deactivate the lock function G see p 5 17 for details The transceiver has a keypad for direct frequency entry as described below Push F INP gyr TATE indicator appears and keypad backlight lights 2 Input the desired frequency e Push to input decimal point between the MHz units and kHz units 3 Push to set the input frequency To cancel the input push 4 wv instead of F NPenr g Soe 21 24000 MHz Push Ear 25 2 4 1 FIL2 F INP USB FIL2 F INP 21 a z E 21 24000 MHz gt 21 36000 MHz Push USB FIL2 gt pe 850 kHz 0 85000 MHz Push FNPewr 0 GENE Fr F INP USB FILZ 24 wwe 1 240 00 FN INP Use FIL2 ae 1 360 00 FANP 7 INP rss sd str 3 BASIC OPERATIONS Quick tuning step ET fom OJ EE oO ao Oc Cee o o o9 KE mae a W lt 7 a fl 4 0000 Select mode Main dial Quick tuning indicator 14 100 00 1 14 100 00 USB 1 4 tuning step function EE ICOM
258. r push to turn the multi function digital meter OPE BASIC OPERATIONS 3 Meter type selection A total of 3 meter types are available in the IC 7700 Standard Edgewise and Bar meters Follow the instructions below for the meter type selec tion SS oo Push several times to return to normal ICOM a G ES screen if necessary Push F 7 SET then push F 3 DISP to select dis O play set mode p 3 Push F 1 A or F 2 V to select Meter type Nor a mal Screen item o 9 ovp 4 Rotate the main dial to select the desired meter type from Standard Edgewise and Bar Push to exit display set mode la LED Unit Bright Backlight Switches Display Type Display Font Meter Response n Meter Type Normal Screen Stam O Z OZ OZ OZO Z O O O v r Meter Type Wide Screen OFF Meter Peak Hold Bar TONE OFF 7 9 0 100 150 200 250W E Voice synthesizer operation The IC 7700 has built in voice synthesizer to an nounce the frequency mode etc S meter level can also be announced p 12 15 in clear electroni cally generated voice in English or Japanese Push SPEECH to announce the currently se o le
259. r the transmission e AUTO TX Automatically transmits the se lected memory To return to re ceive press F12 on the key board e AUTO RX Press F12 on the keyboard to transmit the selected memory Au tomatically returns to receive after the transmission Press F12 on the keyboard to transmit the selected memory and press F12 again to return to re ceive Push to return to exit from PSK memory edit condition e No indication X Y NOTE The transceiver always functions in the Y AUTO TX RX setting when no keyboard is con 7 nected KV Editing PSK memory ABC b 4 fi PTT MYGALL 2 land FT2 MYCGALLS3 ABC m ing O51 UA 599 599 BK Pia SLURS 99 123 BTA DE UR599 QSL DE icom Icom UA 599 599 BK 4 kr DEL SPACE A AUTO TX PT1PTS e Pre programmed contents CH Name Contents gt MYCALLx2 DE Icom Icom K4 PT2 MYCALLx3 DE Icom Icom Icom K4 QSLUR599 JQSL UR 599 599 BK DE UR599 JQSL DE Icom Icom UR 599 599 BK PT6 CQ CQ CQ JCQ CQ CQ DE Icom Icom Icom Kd PT7 RIG amp ANT My transceiver is IC 7700 amp Antenna is a 3 element triband yagi lt l PT8 EQUIP My PSK equipment is internal modulator amp demodulator of the IC 7700 1 RECEIVE AND TRAN
260. re quency when pushed and held for 1 sec v What is the RIT function Receiver incremental tuning RIT shifts the receive fre quency without shifting the transmit frequency This is useful for fine tuning stations calling you off fre quency or when you prefer to listen to slightly different sounding voice characteristics etc CLEAR SWITCH pgs 5 10 6 4 Clears the RIT ATX shift frequency when pushed and held for 1 sec or when pushed momentarily depending on the quick RIT ATX clear function set ting p 12 15 ATX SWITCH p 6 4 Turns the ATX function ON and OFF when pushed e Use RIT ATX control to vary the ATX frequency Adds the ATX shift frequency to the operating frequency when pushed and held for 1 sec Y What is the ATX function ATX shifts the transmit frequency without shifting the re ceive frequency This is useful for simple split frequency operation in CW etc I PANEL DESCRIPTION E Rear panel ANTENNA CONNECTOR 1 ANT 1 ANTENNA CONNECTOR 2 ANT 2 ANTENNA CONNECTOR 3 ANT 3 ANTENNA CONNECTOR 4 ANT 4 p 2 5 Accept a 50 Q antenna with a PL 259 plug connec tor GROUND TERMINAL GND p 2 4 Connect this terminal to a ground to prevent electri cal shocks TVI BCI and other problems p 2 5 p 2 5 p 2 5 OG CIRCUIT BREAKER Cuts off the AC input when over current occurs EXTERNAL DISPLAY TERMINAL EXT DISPLAY p 2 7 Connects
261. re file name and IP address then click Start button Firmware Update Updating the main CPU firmware first It will take approx 1 minute DO NOT turn the IC 7700 power OFF until Completed dialog is displayed Depending on the updated contents the sub CPU and or DSP firmware will automatically be updated when rebooting the IC 7700 and this will take approx 2 minutes DO NOT turn the IC 7700 power OFF until the normal operational screen appears in such case Do you wish to start the firmware update firmware update ue 16 8 MN Start up the IC 7700 Firm Utility e The window as at left appears 2 Read the caution in the window carefully 3 Click Yes if you agree and continue the firmware updating 4 Select the firmware file that has dat extension e g 7700 110 dat e Click then select the file as well as the location 5 Type the IC 7700 s IP address into IC 7700 IP Ad dress text box Click Start T The window as at left appears Read the precaution in the window carefully Click Yes if you want to start the firmware update UPDATING THE FIRMWARE 16 9 The screen as at left is displayed e The following dialog appears in the IC 7700 display n NO MW AR IP ING 1C 7700 Firm Utility Please wait am Firm Utility Version 1 00 C 2007 Icom Inc After this dialog disappears reboot the IC 7700 Firmware File Name sd e IC 7700 IP A
262. reen E 3 Push F 7 SLEEP to select the sleep timer set con dition 7 3 re ee O SH 4 Set the desired time period using the main dial a a Oa seas ea SSS W e TIMER set Push SET blinks e Push F 4 CLR to select to cancel the setting Main dial 6 Push F 7 SET to set the time e Push to cancel the setting BAEN THER e The timer indicator above switch lights green uun AE DAY REPEAT ON OF Mo 6 Push to exit timer set screen Lens 7 The transceiver emits 10 beeps and turns OFF after TER aP the sleep timer period elapses 200 EL e The timer indicator blinks while beeping e Push momentarily to cancel the sleep timer if desired E Timer operation 1 Preset the daily timer as described previously Push momentarily to turn the timer function fom ON Sc crc e The timer indicator above this switch lights green when the timer function is ON 3 Push and hold for 1 sec to turn the power OFF e The timer indicator lights continuously 4 When the set time arrives the power is automati cally turned ON The transceiver emits 10 beeps and turns OFF after the power off period elapses e The timer indicator blinks while beeping e Push momentarily to cancel the sleep timer if desired
263. ring rapid rotation default Auto tuning step is turned ON Faster tun ing step during rapid rotation Auto tuning step is turned OFF High speed default 50 tuning steps sec Low speed 25 tuning steps sec OFF ON Clears the RIT ATX frequency when is pushed momentarily OFF Clears the RIT ATX frequency when is pushed and held for 1 sec default 12 SET MODE HM Others set mode continued NOTCH Switch SSB Selects notch functions for SSB mode operation from Auto Manual and Auto Manual NOTCH Switch AM Selects notch functions for AM mode operation from Auto Manual and Auto Manual DIGI SEL VR Operation Selects DIGI SEL control function from DIGI SEL and APF SSB CW Synchronous Tuning Selects the displayed frequency shift function from ON and OFF default OFF When this function is activated the audio pitch or tones of the received signal will remain the same even when the operating mode is changed between SSB and CW 7 The frequency shifting value may differ according Y to the CW pitch setting CW Normal Side Selects the side band used to receive CW in CW nor mal mode default LSB APF Type Set audio filter shape for APF from SOFT and SHARP default SOFT Auto Manual Auto Only the auto notch can be used e Manual Only the manual notch can be used e Auto Manual Both the auto and manual notch can be used default Auto Manual Aut
264. s ACC 1 pin 3 37 Band voltage output gt 4 BAN Ksa aniateur band Output voltage O to 8 0 V Same as ACC 1 pin 8 TRV Activates X VERTER input output Input impedance More than 10 kQ when HIGH voltage is applied Input voltage 2 to 13 8 V 7 138V Same as ACC 1 pin 7 NOTE If the CW side tone level limit or beep level limit is in use the CW side tone or beep tone de creases from the fixed level when the AF control is rotated above a specified level p 12 6 D 8 RAL BASIC OPERATIONS Section 3 E When first applying power CPU resetting rrrnnnnannnnnnnnnnner 3 2 Bae EE Ua EE RS UNNE 3 2 E Selecting VFO memory mode anrannnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnesnnnnesnnnnnsnen 3 3 E VFO Soloco sessiossa iera Rra EE EE 3 3 Selecting VFO A VFO B arranannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnenr 3 3 VFO equalization ed 3 3 M Selecting an operating band cccceceeceee eee eeeeeeeeeeaseeeaneaes 3 4 Using the band stacking registers ruarrunnnunnrnnvnnanennvennvenner 3 4 E Frequency setting pre iden 3 5 Tuning with the main dial auntadcnmagerrenuodhss cimwneteniethantesasetecatens 3 5 Direct frequency entry with the keypad runnennnennnernnernnennnr 3 5 Quick tuning step oo cece cece cece eee ec eee ec teeta eeeeeeeaeeneeeeaeeneas 3 6 Selecting KHZ step rarrnnnnnrnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnsnnnnnsnesnnsnenn 3 6 1 4 tuning step function
265. s allowed on 5 discrete frequencies and must adhere to the following e USB mode e Maximum of 50 watts ERP Effective Radiated Power e 2 8 kHz bandwidth It s your responsibility to set all controls so that trans mission in this band meets the stringent conditions under which amateur operations may use these fre quencies 7 NOTE We recommend that you store these fre 7 quencies mode and filter settings into memory 7 channels for easy recall The FCC specifies center frequencies on the 5 MHz band However the IC 7700 displays carri er frequency Therefore tune the transceiver to 1 5 kHz below the specified FCC channel center frequency SN 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT E Operating CW KEY SPEED TX indicator RX indicator Band keys ni I LS oe X pi a o o olo o omsO OG AF Main dial Appears BW 500 M SFT 0 BPF JD 14 100 000 1 Convenient functions for receive e Preamp p 5 9 Push P AMP MF3 several times to set the pre amp OFF preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON e P AMP1 or P AMP2 appears when the preamp 1 or preamp 2 is ON Attenuator p 5 9 Push ATT MF4 several times to set the attenu ator in 6 dB steps e
266. s short as pos sible G A WARNING NEVER connect the GND Yy terminal to a gas or electric pipe since the connec j tion could cause an explosion or electric shock NY For radio communications the antenna is of critical im portance along with output power and receiver sensi tivity Select antenna s such as a well matched 50 Q antenna and feedline We recommend 1 5 1 or better of Voltage Standing Wave Ratio VSWR for your de sired band Of course the transmission line should be a coaxial cable When using 1 antenna use the ANT1 connector 7 CAUTION Protect your transceiver from lightning G by using a lightning arrestor Antenna SWR Each antenna is tuned for a specified frequency range and SWR may be increased out of range When the SWR is higher than approx 2 0 1 the transceiver s power drops to protect the final transis tors In this case an antenna tuner is useful to match the transceiver and antenna Low SWR allows full power for transmitting The IC 7700 has an SWR meter to monitor the antenna SWR continuously E USB memory dte USB Memory Not supplied by Icom Connect the USB Memory to the USB connector e Unmount operation is necessary before removing the USB Memory p 12 25 Make sure to connect the USB Memory correctly NEVER connect or remove the USB Memory when the read write indicator lights or blinks MO QV A USB keyboard or USB hub can also be con 7 nected to t
267. s the default setting e Push and hold F 4 DEF for 1 sec to select the default setting Push to return to the previous indi cation e Saving location 1 Push F 1 DIR FILE to select tree view screen 2 Select the desired directory or folder in the USB Memory e Push F 4 gt to select the upper directory e Push F 2 A or F 3 W to select folder in the same directory e Push and hold F 4 gt for 1 sec to select a folder in the directory e Push F 5 REN DEL to rename the folder e Push and hold F 5 REN DEL for 1 sec to delete the folder e Push and hold F 6 MAKE for 1 sec to making a new folder Edit the name with the same manner as the File name above Push F 1 DIR FILE twice to select the file name 4 Push F 6 SAVE e After saving is completed returns to RTTY decode sec ond menu automatically RO For your convenience Two formats Text and HTML are available for storage of data to your PC E Operating PSK TX indicator RX indicator Band keys O fom OG EGGE 6 Coc SSX D 7 0 oO omho OV RTTY PSK Appears O O O FILZ 14 100 00 1 m mmnm mm 3 0SLURSo9 P aani 1 MYGALL x2 4 DE URS99 P 2 NYGALL 3
268. same directory e Push and hold F 4 gt for 1 sec to select a folder in the directory e Push F 5 REN DEL to rename the folder e Push and hold F 5 REN DEL for 1 sec to delete the folder e Push and hold F 6 MAKE for 1 sec to making a new folder Edit the name with the same manner as the s File name above Push F 1 DIR FILE twice to select the file name 4 Push F 6 SAVE e Confirmation screen appears SAVE 5 Push F 6 OK to save e After saving is completed return to USB Memory set menu automatically yok FILE SAVE wok ALL memory and settings will be saved re you gure mAT CHARLIE DAT CANCEL 493 0V8 voce FILE SAVING oc Please wait FILE MANE OPTION 453 008 EDIT DIR FILE 12 22 E File loading WIDE CANCEL Eon reel F6 O com Co Sqr Of D ad F1 F2 Fs F4 AGC SETTING LOAD se _SETOLDAT SETO2DAT 1 091KB 2007 7 11 11 18 COMP SETTING FF WIDE SC OFF 497 068 DIR FILE LOAD OPTION SORT SETTING LOAD 2 FILE LOAD sce SETTING Soca wet 7 SELECTED memory and settings will be changed re you sure 451 08 GET ET DAT DK
269. t menu USB Memory set screen arrangement e USB Memory set menu AGC USE MEMORY SET MID USB MEMORY MENU gt LOAD Load memory and settings for setup SAVE Save your memory and settings FIRM UF Update the firmware of CPUs and DS s FORMAT Format the USB Memory in FAT FATA2 for IC 7700 UNMGLUNT Unmeunt the USh Memory to remove sately SAVE FIRM UP FORMAT UNMOUNT FIRMWARE UPDATE SETT I MG 493 008 Y LOAD OPTION SORT WIDE CANCEL USB MEMOAY SET acc MID USB MEMORY MENU ra SET p LOAD Load memory mo FORMAT tit PET OUT FEF OR SAVE Save your mem IE Address subnet Mask OFF 3 Jr i 3 WIDE Cl V Address WIDE FIRM UP Update the finr Select FAT of FAT3Z Other Memory amp Settings FORMAT Format the USB v r Valiee TX Memory VSC UKMOUNT Unmeunt the U fog ee OFF Voice Ax Memory OFF F acc SETTING SAVE AGC MID MID USB MEMORY MENU z LOAD Load memory a er SAVE Save you MENT WIDE FIRM UF Update the fin SETT I NG LSB Memary will be unmounted FORMAT Format the USB Are you sure VSC vse UNMOUNT Unmount the us O OFF 493 008 PM sal SET 01 DA OFF DIR FILE EDIT OPTION SAVE WIDE CANCEL Fa Fi F2 Fs t4 Ces Fs 77 es e Save option set mode p 12 20 AGC ET TT TE male Gr OFF WIDE vse OFF dk 12 19 12 SET MODE Save option set mode Selects file save condition from All and Select All Saves all the following contents defau
270. talian default English Keyboard Repeat Delay Sets the time period for delay within 100 to 1000 msec in 50 msec steps default 250 msec When a key of the connected keyboard is pressed and held for the set period the character is input con tinuously Keyboard Repeat Rate Sets the repeating rate for the connected keyboard within 2 0 to 30 0 cps default 10 9 cps cps character per second When a key of the connected keyboard is pressed and held the character is repeatedly input with the set speed IP Address Valid after Reboot Sets IP address for the IC 7700 when connecting to your PC or LAN Local Area Network through the Ethernet connector Subnet Mask Valid after Reboot Sets subnet mask for the IC 7700 when connecting to your PC or LAN Local Area Network through the Ethernet connector 12 18 CI V e CI V Outputs data in CI V format default e Decode Outputs decoded contents in ASCII code format English 10 9cps e Available repeating rate 2 0 2 1 2 3 2 5 2 7 3 0 3 3 3 7 4 0 4 3 4 6 5 0 5 5 6 0 6 7 7 5 8 0 8 6 9 2 10 0 10 9 12 0 13 3 15 0 16 0 17 1 18 5 20 0 21 8 24 0 26 7 30 0 0 1 Turn the transceiver power OFF then ON to make the setting effective See p 16 7 for details KY 168 255 255 255 0 24bit Turn the transceiver power OFF then ON to make the setting effective See p 16 7 for details SETMODE 12 E USB Memory se
271. tems 6 Push twice to exit set mode Downloaded by RadioAmateur EU 12 2 SETMODE 12 Screen arrangement 16 41 57 UTC 18 41 usn oe FIL2 1 4 1 O O O O e Display set mode p 12 9 1 14 195 00 USB DISPLAY SET Backlight Switches Display Type A Display Font Basic 1 WIDE Meter Response MID Meter Type Normal Screen Standard vse Meter Type Wide Sereen Bas OFF Meter Peak Hold Bar ON VOICE MEMORY WIDE Fa E2 Les Lea Les Fs F7 e Set mode menu screen p 12 2 SET MODE e Time set mode p 11 2 TIME SET AGC MID AGC MID SET MODE MENU LEVEL TX Tone AX Tone Side Tone ete Time Now 16 47 CLOCK Function OH GLOCKZ Oilset 00 CLOCK Mame UTC Acc ACC IN OUT Signal Levels ete pa hi DISP style Font Pop up EXT Display etc TIME Clock vse OTHERS Other Items OFF USB Land Save settings Update firmware Format USB Memory ete LEVEL ACC DISP TIME OTHERS us Cer 2 3 Cea Ces es Cer e Level set mode p 12 4 Fr LEVEL SET OTHERS SET idan Se ETTE Tone Bass D Beep Confirmation Tone Treble i F gt Beep Band Edge OFF AM AX HPFILPF F Beep Sound WIDE Tone Bass i i Quick SPLIT ON Tone Treble FM SPLIT Offset HF D 100MHz vse FM AX HPF LPF FM SPLIT Offset50M 0 500MHe OFF Tone Bass SPLIT LOCK OFF WIDE WIDE USB MEMOAY SET ACC AF Quiput Level I USB MEMORY MENU ae aan tig LOAD Lo
272. ther methods according to your PC capabili ties e When only one PC connected to the Internet is avail able Refer to W Preparation p 16 3 and E Firmware update USB Memory p 16 4 e When two or more PCs connected to the Internet are available and they are connected to a LAN Local Area Network Refer to W Preparation p 16 3 and either E Firmware update PC p 16 6 or E Firmware update USB Memory p 16 4 Ask your dealer or distributor about how to update the firmware if you have no PC A CAUTION NEVER turn the transceiver power OFF while updating the firmware You can turn the transceiver power OFF only when the transceiver displays that rebooting is required If you turn the transceiver power OFF or if a power fail ure occurs during updating the transceiver firmware will be corrupted and you will have to send the trans ceiver back to the nearest Icom distributor for repair This type of repair is out of warranty even if the war ranty period is still valid Recommendation Backing up the settings and or memory contents to the USB Memory before starting the firmware update is recommended Settings and or memory contents will be lost or re turned to default settings when the firmware update is performed UPDATING THE FIRMWARE 16 E Preparation Firmware and firm utility The latest firmware and the firm utility can be down loaded from the Icom home page via the Internet Ac cess the foll
273. times to close a multi func tion screen if necessary 2 Push F 2 VOICE to call up the voice recorder screen 3 Push to select voice recorder menu 4 Push F 7 SET to select voice set mode screen 5 Push F 1 A or F 2 V to select the desired item 6 Rotate the main dial to set the desired condition or value e Push and hold F 4 DEF for 1 sec to select the default condition or value 7 Push EXIT SET to exit the voice set mode screen Monitors transmitting audio automatically when sending a recorded audio Monitors transmitting audio only when the monitor function is in use 5s e 3 to 10 sec in 1 sec steps can be set default 5 sec 15s e 5 to 15 sec in 1 sec steps can be set default 15 sec 7 VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS E Saving a voice message into the USB Memory Saving the received audio memory The USB Memory is not supplied by Icom EE com O Sar 0 OF oG O eo o o vey 24 550 00 24 950 7T USA 14 100 00 USB RX MEMORY 7 PLAY PROTECT CLR VOICE FILE SAVE 493 008 FILE NAME 6RX 07 02000000 SPAGE WIDE VOICE FILE SAVE jor FILE SAVING 3E Please wait
274. to 5 default 0 Tone Treble Sets the treble level of the receive audio tone in FM mode from 5 to 5 default 0 12 4 7 NOTE When this setting is active below 2 items 7 will be reset to default value 0 Y NOTE When this setting is active below 2 items 7 will be reset to default value 0 7 Y NOTE When this setting is active below 2 items will be reset to default value 0 E Level set mode continued CW RX HPF LPF Sets the low pass filter 100 Hz to 2000 Hz and high pass filter 500 Hz to 2400 of the receive audio in 100 Hz steps in CW mode default OFF RTTY RX HPF LPF Sets the low pass filter 100 Hz to 2000 Hz and high pass filter 500 Hz to 2400 of the receive audio in 100 Hz steps in RTTY mode default OFF PSK RX HPF LPF Sets the low pass filter 100 Hz to 2000 Hz and high pass filter 500 Hz to 2400 of the receive audio in 100 Hz steps in PSK mode default OFF SSB TX Tone Bass Sets the bass level of the transmit audio tone in SSB mode from to 5 default 0 Tone Treble Sets the treble level of the transmit audio tone in SSB mode from 5 to 5 default 0 AM TX Tone Bass Sets the bass level of the transmit audio tone in AM mode from to 5 default 0 Tone Treble Sets the treble level of the transmit audio tone in AM mode from 5 to 5 default 0 FM TX Tone Bass Sets the bass level of the transmit audio ton
275. to an external display monitor e At least 800x600 pixel display is necessary ETHERNET CONNECTOR p 16 6 Connects to a PC through a LAN Local Area Net work CI V REMOTE CONTROL JACK REMOTE pgs 2 6 14 2 Connects a PC via the optional CT 17 CI V LEVEL CONVERTER for external control of the transceiver Used for transceive operation with another Icom Cl V transceiver or receiver Downloaded by RadioAmateur EU 00000100000000 s 00000000000000 RS 232C TERMINAL RS 232C p 2 6 Connects an RS 232C cable D sub 9 pin to con nect the IC 7700 to a PC Can be used to remotely control the IC 7700 with out the optional CT 17 or for RTTY PSK31 de coded signal output The RS 232C interface is wired as a modem DCE MAIN POWER SWITCH I O p 3 2 Turns the internal power supply ON and OFF AC POWER SOCKET AC p 2 5 Connects the supplied AC power cable to an AC line voltage receptacle REFERENCE SIGNAL INPUT OUTPUT TERMINAL REF I O Inputs outputs a 10 MHz reference signal STRAIGHT KEY JACK CW KEY p 2 5 Accepts a straight key or external electronic keyer with 14 inch standard plug ELEC KEY on the front panel can be used for a straight key or external electronic keyer Deactivate the internal electronic keyer in keyer set mode p 4 12 S P DIF INPUT TERMINAL S P DIF IN p 2 7 S P DIF OUTPUT TERMINAL S P DIF OUT p 2 7 Conne
276. to delete a char acter and push F 4 SPACE to insert a space e Pushing the transceiver s keypad 0 9 can also enter numerals 6 Push to set the file name push E Deleting a file AGC MID COMP OFF WIDE vac OFF DIR FILE SETT ING USB MEMORY MENU LOAD SAVE FIRM UP FORMAT UNMOUNT Load memory Save your mem Update the firm Format the USB Unmaunt SETTING SAVE CHARLIEDAT 1 031KB 2087 7 11 16 14 JA FYUA DAT LOJIKE 2007 7 4 16 15 REN DEL SORT 1 03 1K8 a kkk DELETE WEE Are you sure 495 018 CANCEL USB MEMOAY SET ae UNNOUNT Joe LSB Memary will be unmounted Are you sure the LS GANGEL 1225 12 SET MODE 7 RECOMMENDATION Deleting the setting file is ir U reversible Confirm the contents before deleting a 7 setting file MOO During setting save screen display F 1 DIR FILE to select tree view screen e Push F 2 A or F 3 W to select the desired folder e DECODE SETTING and VOICE folders are avail able as the default e After the folder is selected push and hold F 4 P for 1 sec to display content folder s if available Q Push F 1 DIR FILE to select file list screen 3 Push F 2 A or F 3 V to select the desired file to be deleted 4 Push and hold F 5 REN DEL for 1 sec e Confirmation screen appears Push F 6 OK to delete e After the deleting return to setting save screen aut
277. tor your selected oper ating frequency to make sure transmitting won t cause interference to other stations on the same frequency It s good amateur practice to listen first and then even if nothing is heard ask is the frequency in use once or twice before you begin operating on that frequency Before transmitting monitor your selected operating frequency to make sure transmitting won t cause inter ference to other stations on the same frequency 1 Push or PTT microphone to transmit e The TX indicator lights red Push again or release PTT micro phone to return to receive v Adjusting the transmit output power Rotate RF PWR e Adjustable range 5 W to 200 W AM mode 5 W to 50 W Increases max 200 W 50 W for AM Decreases min 5 W Before transmitting monitor your selected operating frequency to make sure transmitting won t cause inter ference to other stations on the same frequency Push METER MF2 to select the ALC meter 2 Push PTT microphone to transmit e Talk into the microphone at your normal voice level 3 While talking into the microphone rotate MIC so that the ALC meter reading doesn t go outside the ALC zone see at left 4 Release PTT microphone to return to receive Drive gain adjustment
278. turn power OFF 16 5 16 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE 3 After the firmware loading is completed the trans ceiver starts the update automatically and the dia log at left is displayed 7 AWARNING NEVER turn the IC 7700 power Y OFF at this stage 7 The transceiver firmware will be corrupted OO When the dialog disappears the precaution at left is displayed 5 Read the precaution carefully and then push F 6 OK e Return to USB Memory set menu Push to turn the IC 7700 power OFF then ON again 7 Depending on the update one or two dialog boxes as at left appear in sequence A AWARNING NEVER turn the IC 7700 power f OFF at this stage 7 The transceiver firmware will be corrupted After the dialog disappears the firmware updating is completed and normal operation screen appears 16 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE E Firmware update PC Connections Connect the IC 7700 and the PC through a LAN Local Area Network as follows Hub Router Ethernet cable Patch cable N a 1 3 Gel se EE to WAN Internet network Purchased separately ay IC 7700 PC1 PC2 192 168 100 13 192 168 100 11 192 168 100 12 C 77 FIN IP address setting example ae 7700 192 IP address 192 168 100 11 192 168 100 12 192 168 100 13 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 255 25
279. tween the year and the month day then rotate the main dial to select them e The date setting and DATE set Push SET indication blink Push F 5 SET to set the date 1 23 1 Rotate the main dial to set the local time e The time setting and TIME set Push SET indication blink Push F 5 SET to set the time ON e ON The CLOCK2 indicator is displayed below the local time indication e OFF The CLOCK2 indicator does not display 0 00 e Push and hold F 4 DEF for 1 sec to select the default value UTC 1 Push F 5 EDIT to select the name edit condition e The cursor under the ist character blinks Push ABC abc 123 or Symbol to select the character group then rotate the main dial to select the character e Push ABC or abc to toggle capital and small letters e Push 123 or Symbol to toggle numerals and sym bols e Push F 1 4 or F 2 gt for cursor movement e Push F 3 DEL to delete the selected character e Push F 4 SPACE to input a space e Pushing the transceiver s keypad 0 9 can also enter numerals Push EXIT SET to set the name E Daily timer setting L DB O o Pees TIMER lt Main dial TIMER pen
280. unctions for transmit cccc ccc e eee ee ence eee eee eens 4 5 About CW reverse mode _ cece cece ccc ece eee ee eee teat eeteeeeaeeaeenaey 4 5 About CW pitch control vene 4 5 CW side tone function saved 4 5 APF Audio Peak Filter operation rrrnrannnannnrnnnnnnnnnrennnennr 4 6 M Electronic keyer functions cc cece ecee cece eens eeeeeeeeeeeeneeneneeas 4 7 Memory keyer Screen ccccceecce cece eesseeeeeeesaeeeseeessneneaneeas 4 8 Editing a memory Keyer cece cece ence cece eee e cease eens eeeneeeaee eas 4 9 Contest number Set mode c cece cece cece cece eee eeae eae eeaeeaees 4 10 Keyer set mode rannnannnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnenannnnnennnnnnnennnnsnnennne 4 11 E Operating RTTY FSK on ccc ccccccecsesceecesscesceedesceseceeceeenees 4 13 Convenient functions for receive oo eee e cece eee cece eee eee cnet eees 4 14 About RTTY reverse mode rrrnrannnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnennne 4 14 Twin peak filter 2 00 ccc cece ese eeeeeeeseeeeeeeesaeeeseeeeeseeeanes 4 14 Functions for the RT TY decoder indication 0 eeeeee 4 15 Setting the decoder threshold level cccceee ese eee eee eeaees 4 15 RTTY memory transmission vesicirurcrnscremeranematrueriinrenesiios 4 16 Automatic transmission reception setting r rrrnnnennnvennvenr 4 16 Q Editing RTTY memory kvern erd 4 17 RTTY decode set mode
281. une the antenna s rrnnnmnnnnnnnnnnnnvnennen 10 7 Section 11 CLOCK AND TIMERS Section 12 SET MODE Section 13 MAINTENANCE E lime set mode 54 11 2 E Daly TN er 11 3 M Setting sleep timer arraanaanannnannannananannennnnanennennnsnnennennnenne 11 4 Teke EEEn NER 11 4 E Set mode description sees apene 12 2 Set mode operation arranannnannanvanavannannenanannennennnennennnnnne 12 2 Screen arrangement Lurer 12 3 W Level set mode rarnnnnananennnannnennnnnnnnnnnsnnnsnnennnennnenunennnsnnne 12 4 E AGC SEL MOdE secede ete tecenacertendceeeacedereateecensesessuenneeaeseasen 12 7 M Display set mode rrarananennnannnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnennnennnsnnne 12 9 Ble NE vr 12 12 E USB Memory set MENU ccc cece ccc ece cece ec eee eee eeeeeeeeaeeaeeees 12 19 USB Memory set screen arrangement ccceseeeeeeeeees 12 19 Save option set mode eee eee ecc eee e eee ee tees eeaeeaeeaeeeaeeaes 12 20 Load option set mode cedcccnpcexenacnswiiccuoeemnacuscenaceeeenuceaeins 12 21 E File saving siuictdnwictasunas sudieinerimndaadihiiatanivisitseantonmandiabeans 12 22 E Fio JOAGING EN 12 23 M Changing a file name rrarannnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnennnennnennnesnnen 12 24 E Deling ANIC eee 12 25 E Unmounting USB Memory _ ccc cece ccc e cece eens eee eeaeeaeeaeeeas 12 25 E Formatting the USB Memory _ cccccceceeeeeeceecesceeesenes 12 26 E Troubleshooting secricceseateavc
282. uto 1 Manual 2 Auto Manual Send read DIGI SEL control func tion 0 DIGI SEL 1 APF Send read SSB CW synchronous tuning function 0 OFF 1 ON Send read CW normal side set 0 LSB 1 USB Set read APF type 0 SHARP 1 SOFT Send read external keypad set for voice memory 0 OFF 1 ON Send read external keypad set for keyer memory O OFF 1 ON Send read CI V transceive set 0 OFF 1 ON Send read RS 232C function 0 CI V 1 Decode Send read RS 232C decode Baud rate 0 300 1 1200 2 4800 3 9600 4 19200 Send read keyboard type 00 English 01 Japanese 02 United Kingdom 03 French 04 French Canadian 05 German 06 Portuguese 07 Portuguese Brazilian 08 Spanish 09 Spanish Latin American 10 Italian Send read keyboard repeat delay 10 100 msec to 100 1000 msec Send read keyboard repeat rate 0 2 0 cps to 31 30 0 cps Send read IP address set 0000000000000001 0 0 0 1 to 0255025502550254 255 255 25 5 254 14 6 050103 050104 050105 050106 050107 050108 050109 050110 050111 050112 050113 050114 050115 050116 050117 050118 050119 050120 050121 050122 050123 1 128 0 0 0 to 30 255 255 255 252 Send read scope indication during TX O OFF 1 ON Send read scope max hold 0 OFF 1 ON Send read scope center frequen cy set 0 Filter center 1 Carrier point center 2 Carrier point cen ter Abs Freq Send read wa
283. vation from 15 30 60 min and OFF e Deactivate the screen saver with OFF selection 6 Push F 2 to select the Screen Saver Type item 7 Rotate the main dial to select the screen saver type from Bound Rotation and Twist e Push and hold F 5 PREVIEW to display the indication for your reference Push twice to exit set mode CONTROL COMMAND Section 14 M Remote jack CI V information arrunvannennennvrnvennenavennennnenr 14 2 Downloaded by O GEV connection example suamsmeseemdseadm senda vennn 14 2 ODE eee 14 2 RadioAmateur EU O Command table ve 14 3 To send read memory contents rrnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnrnvnen 14 9 Band stacking register sun itsdtwanstvaceanesurnannddad cand ecwemiunees 14 9 Codes for memory keyer contents usrrnnnnrnnnnnennnnnnnneneenn 14 9 Codes for memory name opening message and CLOCK2 name contents cccceceece eee eeeeeeeeaeenseaes 14 9 Offset frequency setting ccc ccc eee eeceeee eee eeeeeeeeneeneeaes 14 10 Repeater tone tone squelch frequency setting 05 14 10 SSB transmission passband width setting ece eae 14 10 Color setting xndvancuvenurninmondantyeniancoubaitiuddelievdeadudd serdaaedees 14 10 Bandscope edge frequency setting rrnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnrnnrnnnenn 14 10 Data mode with filter width setting rrnnannnnnnnnrnnrernnnnnen 14 10
284. veform color for receiving signal see p 14 10 for details Send read waveform color for max hold see p 14 10 for details Send read scope sweep speed for 2 5 kHz span 0 Slow 1 Mid 2 Fast Send read scope sweep speed for 5 kHz span 0 Slow 1 Mid 2 Fast Send read scope sweep speed for 10 kHz span 0 Slow 1 Mid 2 Fast Send read scope sweep speed for 25 kHz span 0 Slow 1 Mid 2 Fast Send read scope sweep speed for 50 kHz span 0 Slow 1 Mid 2 Fast Send read scope sweep speed for 100 kHz span 0 Slow 1 Mid 2 Fast Send read scope sweep speed for 250 kHz span 0 Slow 1 Mid 2 Fast Send read scope edge frequen cies for 0 03 to 1 60 MHz band see p 14 10 for details Send read scope edge frequen cies for 1 60 to 2 00 MHz band see p 14 10 for details Send read scope edge frequen cies for 2 00 to 6 00 MHz band see p 14 10 for details Send read scope edge frequen cies for 6 00 to 8 00 MHz band see p 14 10 for details Send read scope edge frequen cies for 8 00 to 11 00 MHz band see p 14 10 for details Send read scope edge frequen cies for 11 00 to 15 00 MHz band see p 14 10 for details Send read scope edge frequen cies for 15 00 to 20 00 MHz band see p 14 10 for details Send read scope edge frequen cies for 20 00 to 22 00 MHz band see p 14 10 for details Send read scope edge frequen cies for 22 00 to 26 00 MHz band see p 14 10 for details Command t
285. via a LAN for the 800x600 resolution CPU firmware Video output signal can r be turned ON and OFF in set mode p 12 11 ere k WN SEE OD So oe Go eG amp 10000000000000 EE 0 0 gt e 40000000000000 e REF I O DC OUT EXT F GA EE DES 10MHz O X VERTER MAX1A METER KEYPAD EXT SP 2 RELAY Gre ADJ CWKEY 10dBm gt 0 QQ GO NHOG METER S P DIF IN OUT Connects an external meter etc Connects a PC for audio signal data 48 kHz 16 bit input output 3 5 d mm 1 8 plug DC OUT External keypad Outputs regulated 14 V Connects an external keypad for direct voice memory approx DC for external and memory keyer controls equipment power supply EXTERNAL KEYPAD max 1 A capacity 1 5 KQ 5 S1 T1 M1 3 5 d mm 1 8 plug switch Mutes both transmission and reception when switched ON during trans ceive operation etc 2 1 2 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS E Linear amplifier connections Connecting the IC PW1 EURO To an antenna ANT 1 i 4 INPUT IC PW1 EURO AC outlet Non European versions 100 120 220 240 V European version 230 V amp 90 Connecting a non Icom linear amplifier EEE Fey e Ge ST ca 000 a 3
286. y channels P1 and P2 Scan edge P2 or P1 Scan edge P1 or P2 This scan operates in VFO mode MEMORY SCAN Repeatedly scans all programmed memory channels Blank channel 1 x2 and x3 show that the channel is specified as the select memory This scan operates in memory mode E Preparation e Channels For programmed scan Program scan edge frequencies into scan edge mem ory channels P1 and P2 For AF scan Set the AF span AF scan range in the scan screen For memory scan Program 2 or more memory channels except scan edge memory channels For select memory scan Designate 2 or more memory channels as select mem ory channels To designate the channel as a select memory channel choose a memory channel then push F 3 SELECT in the scan screen memory mode or in the memory list screen e Scan resume ON OFF You can select the scan to resume or cancel when de tecting a signal in set mode Scan resume ON OFF must be set before operating a scan See p 9 3 for ON OFF setting and scan resume condition details 9 2 r e The scan function can be used on the main read out only e You can operate a scan while operating on a fre quency using the split functions TLL AF SCAN Repeatedly scans within AF span area Start frequency AF frequency AF frequency This scan operates in both VFO and memory modes SELECT MEMORY SCAN Repeatedly scans all or one of 3 select memory ch

Icom i7700 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents